Basic Emirati Arabic [1 ed.] 9781032335711, 9781032335704

Citation preview

BASIC EMIRATI ARABIC

Basic Emirati Arabic: A Grammar and Workbook is an elementary-level grammar book of the variety of Gulf Arabic spoken in the United Arab Emirates. In this book, a series of compact units provide brief and concise descriptions of the fundamental grammatical structures, accompanied by examples drawn from Emirati native language speakers and several exercises assessing the learner’s understanding and mastery of the grammatical structure discussed. A key to these exercises is also provided so that learners can self-assess their progress and obtain immediate feedback. This book is intended for beginner learners who would like to engage with this variety of Arabic and learn its basic grammatical structure through practice. It is additionally a valuable tool for language teachers of Emirati and Gulf Arabic as well as learners of Modern Standard Arabic who would like access to a basic reference of the dialect. Tommi Tsz-Cheung Leung is Professor of Linguistics at the Department of Cognitive Sciences, United Arab Emirates University. He specializes in the syntax of Emirati Arabic and the psycholinguistics of Arabic and Southeast Asian languages. Dimitrios Ntelitheos is Professor of Linguistics and Chair of the Speech Language Pathology Department at United Arab Emirates University. His research and published work focus on Malagasy, Greek, and Emirati Arabic morphological and syntactic structure and its acquisition by children. Meera Al Kaabi is an Associate Professor at the Cognitive Science Department of UAEU and a visiting scholar at NYUAD. She works in neurolinguistics, psycholinguistics, language disorders, and Arabic morphology. She also has a professional background in academic administration and policy development.

Routledge Grammar Workbooks Other titles available in the Grammar Workbooks series are: Basic Arabic Basic Cantonese, 2nd Edition Intermediate Cantonese, 2nd Edition Basic Chinese, 2nd Edition Intermediate Chinese, 2nd Edition Basic Dutch, 2nd Edition Intermediate Dutch Basic Emirati Arabic Basic German, 2nd Edition Intermediate German, 2nd Edition Basic Irish Intermediate Irish Basic Italian Basic Japanese Intermediate Japanese Basic Korean, 2nd Edition Intermediate Korean, 2nd Edition Intensive Basic Latin Intensive Intermediate Latin Basic Persian, 2nd Edition Intermediate Persian, 2nd Edition Basic Polish, 2nd Edition Intermediate Polish Basic Portuguese Intermediate Portuguese Basic Russian, 2nd Edition Intermediate Russian, 2nd Edition Basic Spanish Intermediate Spanish Basic Swedish Intermediate Swedish Basic Welsh, 2nd Edition Intermediate Welsh, 2nd Edition Basic Yiddish For more information on the series, please visit: www.routledge.com/Grammar-Workbooks/ book-series/SE0519

BASIC EMIRATI ARABIC A Grammar and Workbook

Tommi Tsz-Cheung Leung, Dimitrios Ntelitheos and Meera Al Kaabi

First published 2024 by Routledge 4 Park Square, Milton Park, Abingdon, Oxon OX14 4RN and by Routledge 605 Third Avenue, New York, NY 10158 Routledge is an imprint of the Taylor & Francis Group, an informa business © 2024 Tommi Tsz-Cheung Leung, Dimitrios Ntelitheos, and Meera Al Kaabi The right of Tommi Tsz-Cheung Leung, Dimitrios Ntelitheos, and Meera Al Kaabi to be identified as authors of this work has been asserted in accordance with sections 77 and 78 of the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988. All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reprinted or reproduced or utilised in any form or by any electronic, mechanical, or other means, now known or hereafter invented, including photocopying and recording, or in any information storage or retrieval system, without permission in writing from the publishers. Trademark notice: Product or corporate names may be trademarks or registered trademarks, and are used only for identification and explanation without intent to infringe. British Library Cataloguing-in-Publication Data A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data A catalog record has been requested for this book ISBN: 978-1-032-33571-1 (hbk) ISBN: 978-1-032-33570-4 (pbk) ISBN: 978-1-003-32024-1 (ebk) DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241 Typeset in Times New Roman by codeMantra

CONTENTS

Prefacevii  1 Introduction

1

 2 Consonants

3

 3 Vowels

11

  4 Writing System

14

  5 Word Formation

21

 6 Nouns

24

 7 Pronouns

30

  8 Form I Verbs

34

  9 Form II Verbs

37

10 Form III Verbs

39

11 Form V Verbs

41

12 Form VI Verbs

45

13 Form VII Verbs

48

14 Form VIII Verbs

51

15 Form IX Verbs

54

16 Form X Verbs

56

17 Intransitive, Transitive, and Ditransitive Verbs

59

18 Verbal Nouns

63

19 Adjectives

68

20 Adverbs

74

21 Prepositions

81

22 Quantifiers

85

v

Contents

23 Numerals

88

24 Modality

93

25 Negation

97

26 Noun Phrases

101

27 Construct States and Possessive Constructions

106

28 Verb Phrases and Basic Sentence Structure

111

29 Complex Verb Constructions

115

30 The Imperfective Aspect

117

31 The Perfective Aspect

122

32 The Grammatical Aspect

126

33 Relative Clauses and Complement Clauses

129

34 Questions

132

35 Subordination

136

36 Coordination

139

Key to Exercises 143 Index169

vi

PREFACE

This is an elementary-level grammar book of Emirati Arabic, the variety of Gulf Arabic spoken in the United Arab Emirates. It is intended for absolute beginner learners who are interested in this specific Arabic variety and would like to get first-hand information on its basic grammatical structure. This book is organized as a series of small units, each unit providing a brief, concise, and technically simple grammatical description of a fundamental grammatical property of the variety. The theoretical description is accompanied by several examples drawn from Emirati native language speakers of the variety, which illustrate the function and use of the grammatical property under discussion. Finally, each unit ends with several exercises assessing the learner’s understanding and mastery of the grammatical structure discussed. A key to these exercises is also provided so that learners can self-assess their progress and obtain immediate feedback. Given the nature of this basic grammatical description, we have avoided the discussion of several complex grammatical properties, including extended explanations of the phonological system of Emirati Arabic, as well as technical discussions of complicated and highly irregular grammatical structures. However, we have provided transcriptions of the data in both International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) form and using Arabic script, in order to allow for the use of the grammar in both independent learning contexts and a classroom setting, which may require familiarization with the Arabic script. Explanations of the sounds corresponding to IPA symbols and Arabic script use have been provided. For readers who would like to follow up these basic descriptions with more detailed discussion or more formal analyses of the finer grammatical points of the variety, we suggest our Routledge Emirati Arabic: A Comprehensive Grammar, which provides a more rigorous, thorough, and slightly more formal discussion into the finer aspects of the Emirati Arabic grammar. We would like to express our gratitude to our students at the United Arab Emirates University who contributed significantly to the language materials used in this grammar/workbook. In particular, we would like to thank Souad Al Helou, Meriem Madi, Alia Nuami, and Fatima Boush for proofreading our grammar/workbook. Our academic collaboration with Routledge has been extremely rewarding, and we want to take this opportunity to thank Andrea Hartill for her continuous support of our project and Iola Ashby for her editorial assistance.

vii

UNIT 1 Introduction

This elemental grammar/workbook provides a basic grammatical description with accompanying practice exercises in Emirati Arabic. We use the term Emirati Arabic to refer to the variety of Arabic as used within the confines of the United Arab Emirates (UAE). In this respect, Emirati Arabic is a variety of the Gulf Arabic dialect, which is spoken in the broader region of the East coastal part of the Arabian Peninsula. Gulf Arabic is an educated koine, an umbrella term for several smaller varieties spoken in the countries of Qatar, Kuwait, Bahrain, the UAE, certain coastal areas of Saudi Arabia and Oman, and certain pockets within the coastal areas of Iran and Iraq. While dialect is recognized as the common means of communication for populations in all these areas, differences in pronunciation, vocabulary, sentence structure, and usage are perceived when speakers from different varieties attempt to communicate with each other. Speakers of one variety can always identify the origin of a speaker of another variety based mainly on pronunciation and vocabulary. Emirati Arabic also exhibits considerable variation across local populations. This variation is mostly geographically defined with a tribal character, in that its distinct characteristics are confined within a tribal group residing in a specific area within the country. For this particular grammar/workbook, we have strived to collect data from diverse speakers across the UAE. However, certain factors may have slightly affected the collected data, as most informants come from urban environments and are educated speakers from tertiary institutions.

Emirati vs. Modern Standard Arabic As is the case with many other Arab countries, the UAE is characterized by both a diglossic and a multilingual linguistic environment. Emirati children are exposed to Emirati Arabic, but depending on their cultural upbringing and family situation, some Emirati children have been exposed to English or various Asian languages (e.g., Indonesian, Tagalog, South Asian languages). When they approach school age, they become more exposed to Modern Standard Arabic, the formal variety of Arabic used in educational and religious contexts, the media, and in government documents and political discourse, throughout the entire Arab world. This creates a diglossic situation, where Emirati Arabic is used in everyday spoken contexts and

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-1

1

1 Introduction

Modern Standard Arabic in formal written contexts. At the same time, English has become a lingua franca in the UAE, where certain employment trends and economic growth needs have attracted people from all over the world. The prominence of English is the result of historical circumstances, especially the growth of British naval power in the 19th century and its influence in the broader Gulf region from the latter half of the 20th century. This historical precedent was one of the factors establishing English as the means in many aspects of everyday communication in the region and as a medium of instruction in the national institutions of tertiary education. Most of the native speakers who have provided data for this grammar use Emirati Arabic in their everyday communication, Modern Standard Arabic in formal contexts, and English as a medium of instruction at the university. As a result of this interaction, there is influence from both Modern Standard Arabic and English in various linguistic aspects of Emirati Arabic. Some of these aspects of the interaction between Emirati Arabic, Modern Standard Arabic, and English were addressed in Emirati Arabic: A Comprehensive Grammar (Routledge Comprehensive Grammars series). We have chosen to avoid any such discussion here, as we are trying to concentrate only on the basic aspects of the grammatical system of the variety and the pedagogical objective of presenting these structures with workbook sections to facilitate the learning process. Our target readers are independent learners of Emirati (and Gulf) Arabic at the elementary level who want easy access to the essential aspects of the grammatical structure of the dialect, with no required previous knowledge of linguistic and grammatical theory and terminology. All word and sentence examples and practice questions and their answers are presented in Arabic script (for readers who would like to study Arabic writing) and phonetic transcription.1 This grammar/workbook is also a useful pedagogical tool for instructors of Emirati and Gulf Arabic who want to implement a grammar book in their courses that also provides a workbook session.

Note 1 With respect to the glossaries provided, English word translations such as ‘teacher’, ‘worker’, ‘tall’, etc., indicate masculine nouns; otherwise, they are translated as ‘teacher (f)’, ‘worker (f)’, and ‘tall (f)’. Translations such as ‘teachers’ are again understood as masculine in gender and plural in number. The basic verb form formed by the root consonants only is in the perfective aspect, e.g., ‫‘ كتب‬wrote’. Sometimes, depending on the usage, the imperfect aspect may be indicated, e.g., ‫‘ يدرس‬study’.

2

UNIT 2 Consonants

While overall similar, the inventory of Emirati Arabic consonants is slightly different from that of Modern Standard Arabic (MSA). Most Emirati Arabic consonants are identical to MSA and other Arabic dialects, e.g., [b], [t], etc. However, some letters can be pronounced differently in Emirati Arabic, e.g., ‫ ق‬can be pronounced as [g] for local words (while [q] can still be heard for some MSA words), and ‫ ك‬can be pronounced as [k] or [ʧ]. The consonants in this book are represented by the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA), which accurately depicts the actual pronunciation, and this is the main reason it is adopted for this book. Most IPA symbols are straightforward (e.g., [b], [t], [d], etc.), whereas some symbols require some additional learning (e.g., [θ], [x], etc.).1

‫[ ا‬ʔ] ‫[ ب‬b] ‫[ ت‬t] ‫[ ث‬θ] ‫[ ج‬ʤ] [ʧ]

‫ح‬

[j] [ħ]

‫[ خ‬x] ‫[ د‬d] ‫[ ذ‬ð]

‫انتي‬ ً‫ابدا‬ ‫برد‬ ‫بحر‬ ‫رحت‬ ‫عطت‬ ‫ثوب‬ ‫ثمان‬ ‫جريب‬ ‫جايزه‬ ‫باجر‬ ‫جدول‬ ‫جار‬ ‫حرمه‬ ‫حريج‬ ‫وصخ‬ ‫خذ‬ ‫بخور‬ ‫درس‬ ‫عدال‬ ‫تشذب‬ ‫ذاب‬

[ʔənti] [ʔabdan] [bard] [baħər] [rəħt] [ʕətʕat] [θoob] [θəmaan] [dʒəriib] [ʤaajza] [baaʧər] [ʤadwal] [jaar] [ħərmah] [ħəriiʤ] [wəsˤax] [xəð] [buxuur] [dars] [ʕəddaal] [ʧaðb] [ðaab]

you (f) never cold sea I went gave (f) dress eight soon/nearby reward tomorrow schedule neighbor woman fire dirt take (imperative) incense lesson near lied melted

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-2

3

‫[ ر‬r]

2 Consonants

‫[ ز‬z] ‫[ س‬s] ‫[ ش‬ʃ] ‫[ ص‬sˤ] ‫[ ط‬tˤ] ‫[ ظ‬ðˤ] ‫[ ع‬ʕ] ‫[ غ‬ɣ] ‫[ ف‬f] ‫[ ق‬q]

[g]

‫[ ك‬k]

[ʧ]

‫[ ل‬l]

[lˁ]

‫[ م‬m] 4

‫[ ن‬n]

‫ركب‬ ‫كره‬ ‫زميل‬ ‫جواز‬ ‫عسل‬ ‫كنعد‬ ‫شمعة‬ ‫شوكة‬ ‫سمج‬ ‫صفر‬ ‫صاروخ‬ ‫مصنع‬ ‫طالعة‬ ‫طويل‬ ‫طالب‬ ‫ظرف‬ ‫نظارة‬ ‫مظلة‬ ‫أعتقد‬ ‫عاملة‬ ‫غسالة‬ ‫غ زال‬ ‫مغناطيس‬ ‫منفاخ‬ ‫مفتاح‬ ‫فاز‬ ‫قنفذ‬ ‫قرد‬ ‫سقى‬ ‫قريب‬ ‫عرق‬ ‫حلق‬ ‫إقتصاد‬ ‫فقير‬ ‫م راقب‬ ‫كتاب‬ ‫كلب‬ ‫ضحك‬ ‫بصل‬ ‫جبال‬ ‫طالب‬ ‫مشغول‬ ‫مسمار‬ ‫نحلة‬ ‫نار‬

[rəkab] [karah] [zamiil] [ʤǝwaaz] [ʕəsal] [kanʕad] [ʃamʕa] [ʃooka] [səmaʧ] [sˤəfər] [sˤaaruux] [masˤnaʕ] [tˤaalʕah] [tˤəwiil] [tˤaaləb] [ðˤarf] [naðˤðˤaara] [məðˁalla] [aʕtəqəd] [ʕaamla] [ɣassaala] [ɣəzaal] [məɣnaatˤiis] [mənfaax] [məftaaħ] [faaz] [qənfəðˤ] [gǝrd] [səga] [gəriib] [ʕərg] [ħalg] [əqtəsˤaad] [faqiir] [muraqəb] [ktaab] [ʧalb] [ðˤaħħak] [bəsˤal] [jbaal] [tˤaalˤəb] [maʃɣuul] [məsmaar] [naħla] [naar]

ride (past tense) hated classmate passport honey mackerel candle fork fish zero rocket factory getting out (f) tall student envelope eyeglass umbrella I think worker washing machine gazelle magnet air pump key won urchin monkey watered close to vein pharynx economy poor monitor book dog made someone laugh onion mountains student busy nail bee fire

‫[ هـ‬h]

‫هالل‬ ‫قهوة‬ ‫ملون‬ ‫ورقة‬ ‫تريا‬ ‫يوم‬

‫[ و‬w] ‫[ ي‬j]

[hlaal] [gahwa] [mlawwan] [wǝrga] [trajja] [joom]

crescent coffee colored paper waited day

2 Consonants

A number of Emirati Arabic words contain long consonants, i.e., geminates, represented as two adjacent identical consonants and indicated in text with shaddah [ ] above the geminated consonant. Geminates can appear word-medially or word-finally, but never word-initially: Word-medial geminates

‫[ تغ ّدى‬tɣadda] ‫[ ل ّع ب‬laʕʕab] ‫درّس‬ ‫ص فّ ر‬ ‫ق رّب‬ ‫ص وّر‬

[darras] [sˤaffar] [garrab] [sˤawwar]

had lunch made someone play taught whistled came closer captured

‫[ ض ّح ك‬ðˤaħħak] ‫[ ك ّس ر‬kassar] ‫خ رّب‬ ‫ن ّزل‬ ‫خ يّط‬ ‫ك رّم‬

[xarrab] [nazzal] [xajjatˤ] [karram]

made someone laugh broke destroyed lowered sewed caused generosity

Word-final geminates

‫ش ّم‬ ‫ز ّل‬ ّ ‫لف‬ ‫م ّر‬ ‫م ّل‬

[ʃamm] [zall] [laff] [marr] [mall]

smelled slipped wrapped passed (got) bored

‫ظ ّم‬ ‫ز ّم‬ ‫ه ّم‬ ‫غ ّم‬ ّ‫مط‬ ‫م ّد‬

[ðˤamm] [zamm] [hamm] [ɣamm] [matˤtˤ] [madd]

hugged tightened worry gloom stretched expand

Practice Exercise 2.1 1. Which of the following Arabic letters corresponds to the sound [b]?

‫ب‬ b. ‫ث‬ c. ‫ت‬ d. ‫أ‬ a.

5

2. Which of the following Arabic letters corresponds to the sound [h]?

2 Consonants

‫ص‬ b. ‫ث‬ c. ‫ف‬ d. ‫هـ‬ a.

3. Which of the following Arabic letters corresponds to the sound [m]?

‫ن‬ b. ‫م‬ c. ‫و‬ d. ‫ب‬ a.

4. Which of the following Arabic letters corresponds to the sound [ħ]?

‫ح‬ ‫ج‬ c. ‫خ‬ d. ‫ه‬ a.

b.

5. Which of the following Arabic letters can correspond to the sound [j]?

‫ح‬ b. ‫أ‬ c. ‫و‬ d. ‫ج‬ a.

6. Which of the following Arabic letters corresponds to the sound [w]?

‫و‬ b. ‫ض‬ c. ‫ص‬ d. ‫ي‬ a.

7. Which of the following Arabic letters corresponds to the sound [ɣ]?

‫ع‬ b. ‫ق‬ c. ‫غ‬ d. ‫ف‬ a.

6

8. Which of the following Arabic letters corresponds to the sound [ðˤ]?

‫ظ‬ b. ‫ذ‬ c. ‫ز‬ d. ‫ث‬ a.

2 Consonants

9. Which of the following Arabic letters corresponds to the sound [tˤ]?

‫ط‬ ‫ص‬ c. ‫ض‬ d. ‫ظ‬ a.

b.

10. Which of the following Arabic letters corresponds to the sound [sˤ]?

‫س‬ ‫ص‬ c. ‫ث‬ d. ‫ز‬ a.

b.

11. Which of the following Arabic letters corresponds to the sound [θ]?

‫ت‬ b. ‫ذ‬ c. ‫ق‬ d. ‫ث‬ a.

12. Which of the following Arabic letters corresponds to the sound [ʃ]?

‫أ‬ ‫ك‬ c. ‫ش‬ d. ‫س‬ a.

b.

Exercise 2.2 True or False   1. Some Arabic letters may correspond to more than one Emirati Arabic sound.   2. [ʃallat] contains a word-medial geminate.

7

2 Consonants

  3.   4.   5.  6.  7.  8.  9. 10.

[zall] contains a word-final geminate. [namm] contains a word-medial geminate. [tɣadda] contains a word-final geminate. The second letter of [aʕtəqəd] is (‫)ع‬. The third letter of [taqriiban] is (‫)ك‬. The third letter of [raʔs] is (‫)أ‬. The first letter of [kərsii] is (‫)ق‬. The first letter of [ʤəddaam] is (‫)ج‬.

Exercise 2.3 What are the IPA transcriptions of the following words? 1. ‫‘ خبّر‬told’ a. xarrab b. xabbar c. xabar d. xarab 2. ‫‘ أ ّكل‬made someone eat’ a. ʔakkal b. ʔakal c. ʕakkal d. ʔaqqal 3. ‫‘ رحّب‬welcomed’ a. raħħab b. raħab c. rahhab d. rahab 4. ‫‘ شد‬tighten’ a. ʃadd b. ʃad c. ʧadd d. ʧad 8

5. ‫‘ نام‬slept’ a. mann

2 Consonants

b. naamm c. namm d. naam 6. ‫‘ ب ّدل‬replaced’ a. baddal b. badal c. dabbal d. dabal 7. ‫‘ لبّس‬made someone wear’ a. labas b. labbass c. labbas d. laddas 8. ‫‘ شم‬smelled’ a. ʃamm b. ʃam c. ʃaam d. ʤamm 9. ‫‘ فر‬escaped’ a. raff b. farr c. far d. laff 10.

‫‘ غسّل‬washed’ a. ɣassal b. ɣasal c. ɣassall d. ʕassal

9

Exercise 2.4

2 Consonants

Matching: Identify the Emirati Arabic sounds for the following words.  1.  2.  3.  4.  5.  6.  7.  8.  9. 10.

‫حريج‬ ‫ثجيل‬ ‫باجر‬ ‫صف‬ ‫سؤال‬ ‫ورد‬ ‫حبر‬ ‫فلوس‬ ‫بيوت‬ ‫نخلة‬

a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j

ħ-r-ʤ sˤ - f - f w-r-d n-x-l θ-ʤ-l s-ʔ-l b-j-t f-l-s ħ-b-r b-ʧ-r

Exercise 2.5 Match the following Arabic words with the accurate phonetic transcription.  1.  2.  3.  4.  5.  6.  7.  8.  9. 10.

‫جريب‬ ‫حرمه‬ ‫م راقب‬ ‫عرق‬ ‫مفتاح‬ ‫غسالة‬ ‫عطت‬ ‫بخور‬ ‫تشذب‬ ‫ورقة‬

a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j

wǝrga ʕətʕat ɣassaala ħərmah məftaaħ ʕərg buxuur muraqəb ʤəriib ʧaðb

Note 1 We recommend the following website for the actual pronunciation of IPA symbols: [https://www.internationalphoneticassociation.org/IPAcharts/inter_chart_2018/ IPA_2018.html]

10

UNIT 3 Vowels

Emirati Arabic contains a small number of short and long vowels (indicated by doubling the single vowels, e.g., [ii], [uu], etc.). The mid-central vowel [ə] is salient in Emirati Arabic and, in many cases, unpronounced (e.g., [xəð] ‘take’ can be pronounced as [xð] in daily conversations). While short vowels can be expressed by the use of diacritical marks (i.e., fatħah ‫ــ َ ـ‬, dˁammah ‫ـ ـ ُـ‬, kasrah ‫)ـ ـِ ـ‬, they are mostly restricted to vowelized Arabic writing, which rarely appears in everyday writing. Instead, unvowelized Arabic writing is adopted in most contexts. On the other hand, long vowels are represented by symbols drawn from the consonantal inventory and are required in writing (‫ ا‬for [aa], ‫ ي‬for [ii] and [ee], and ‫ و‬for [uu]).1

‫ ــَـ‬a ‫ ــِـ‬i ‫ ــُـ‬u

‫أح َم د‬ ‫يِ ديد‬ ‫ُم ر‬ (no written form) ə ‫السيارة‬ ‫ ا‬aa ‫قام‬ ‫ ي‬ii ‫ريل‬ ‫ ي‬ee ‫بيض‬ ‫ و‬uu ‫شو‬ ‫ و‬oo ‫لون‬

[aħmad] [jidiid] [murr] [əssajjaara] [gaam] [riil] [beeð] [ʃuu] [loon]

Ahmad new bitter the car stood up leg egg what color

Practice Glossary

‫قيض‬ ‫بروش‬ ‫غليظ‬ ‫مسمار‬ ‫بيت‬ ‫زايد‬ ‫الحين‬ ‫ليت‬

geeðˤ bruuʃ ɣəliiðˤ məsmaar beet zaajəd əlħiin leet

summer brush thick nail house Zayed now light

11

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-3

‫شلّ وه‬ ‫مينون‬ ‫َش ب‬ ‫َر ّدو‬ ‫سما‬ ‫ِك تِ ب‬ ‫سار‬ ‫ركض‬ ‫خذ‬

3 Vowels

ʃallooh majnuun ʃabb raddaw səma kətəb saar rəkaðˤ xað

took him away crazy light on fire (they) came back sky books (he) went (he) ran (he) took

Exercise 3.1 Highlight the vowels from the following Emirati Arabic words. a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

‫كتاب‬ ‫شاف‬ ‫لف‬ ‫شوط‬ ‫عربانه‬ ‫موز‬ ‫بيض‬

kətaab ʃaaf laff ʃootˤ ʕərəbaanah mooz beeðˤ

book (he) saw (he) turned around half (football half) trolley banana egg

Exercise 3.2 For each of the following Arabic words, identify the corresponding long vowels. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

‫زايد‬ ‫الحين‬ ‫ليت‬ ‫شلوه‬ ‫مينون‬

Exercise 3.3 For each of the following Arabic words, identify the corresponding short vowels. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 12

‫َش ب‬ ‫ُر ّدو‬ ‫ُم دير‬ ‫سما‬ ‫يِ مين‬

Exercise 3.4 For the following words, identify all short and long vowels. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

3 Vowels

‫قيض‬ ‫سار‬ ‫ِركض‬ ‫بروش‬ ‫غليظ‬ ‫خذ‬ ‫مسمار‬ ‫بيت‬

Note 1 Please refer to the following website for actual pronunciations of the vowels: [https:// www.internationalphoneticassociation.org/IPAcharts/inter_chart_2018/IPA_2018. html]

13

UNIT 4 Writing System

As a regional variety of Arabic, Emirati Arabic’s alphabet stems from the corresponding Modern Standard Arabic (MSA) script. All 28 letters of the Arabic alphabet can be used to represent Emirati Arabic words, though the actual pronunciation of some letters may be different. The pronunciation differences between MSA and Emirati Arabic lead to the occurrence of informal spellings (considered as incorrect by educated readers) by Emirati people. The most typical example is the letter ‫ض‬, which is pronounced as [dˤ] in MSA, but is uniformly pronounced as [ðˤ] by Emiratis. Since [ðˤ] also represents another Arabic letter ‫ظ‬, Emirati people sometimes confuse the correct spelling of words, which involve ‫ض‬, e.g., they may spell [ðˤabaab] ‘fog’ as ‫ ظباب‬or ‫( ضباب‬considered as incorrect by some readers). Another pair of confused letters is ‫ ج‬and ‫ ج‬.‫ ي‬can be pronounced as [ʤ] (the standard MSA pronunciation) and as [j]. However, [j] can also be the realized pronunciation of the letter ‫ي‬, and thus, Emiratis may spell the word ‫[ جديد‬jədiid] ‘new’ as ‫يديد‬, and ‫وجه‬ [wajh] ‘face’ as ‫ويه‬, etc. The following table, while very similar to other language books on MSA, differs slightly in the pronunciation of several letters. It is unsurprising to hear Emirati people pronounce the letter ‫ ض‬as [ðˤaad], and ‫ ق‬as [gaaf], which may be considered incorrect by educated Arabs. Letter Transcription Name of Letter

‫ا‬ ‫ب‬ ‫ت‬ ‫ث‬ ‫ج‬ ‫ح‬ ‫خ‬ ‫د‬ ‫ذ‬ ‫ر‬ ‫ز‬ 14

ʔ b t θ ʤ j ħ x d ð r z

‫أَلِ ف‬ ‫بَ اء‬ ‫تَاء‬ ‫ثَ اء‬ ‫ِج يم‬

ʔalif baaʔ taaʔ θaaʔ ʤiim

‫َح اء‬ ‫َخ اء‬ ‫دَال‬ ‫َذال‬ ‫َراء‬ ‫زَاي‬

ħaaʔ xaaʔ daal ðaal raaʔ zaay

(Continued)

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-4

Letter Transcription Name of Letter

‫س‬ ‫ش‬

s ʃ ʧ sˤ ðˤ tˤ ðˤ ʕ ɣ f q g k l m n h w j

‫ص‬ ‫ض‬ ‫ط‬ ‫ظ‬ ‫ع‬ ‫غ‬ ‫ف‬ ‫ق‬ ‫ك‬ ‫ل‬ ‫م‬ ‫ن‬ ‫ه‬ ‫و‬ ‫ي‬

‫ ِس ين‬siin ‫ ِش ين‬ʃiin ‫ص اد‬ َ ‫ض اد‬ َ ‫طَ اء‬ ‫ظَ اء‬ ‫َع يْن‬ ‫َغ يْن‬ ‫فَ اء‬ ‫قَ اف‬ ‫َك اف‬ ‫َلم‬ ‫ِم يم‬ ‫نُ ون‬ ‫هَاء‬ ‫َواو‬ ‫يَ اء‬

4 Writing System

sˤaad dˤaadˤ tˤaaʔ ðˤaaʔ ʕajn ɣajn faaʔ qaaf gaaf kaaf laam miim nuun haaʔ waaw jaaʔ

Arabic letters (28 in total) are known for their right-to-left ligature system, i.e., a letter may be connected with its preceding letter (i.e., to its left) or the following one (i.e., to its right), depending on its position within the word. Most letters are connected with the following letter, whereas a minority of them are connected to their preceding letter. In addition, each Arabic letter assumes a particular shape depending on its position (i.e., initial, medial, and final). Some letters maintain a similar shape across positions (e.g., ‫ بـ‬in word-initial position, ‫ ـبـ‬in word-medial position, and ‫ـب‬ in word-final position), yet some letters have significantly different shapes (e.g., ‫ عـ‬in word-initial position, ‫ ـعـ‬in word-medial position, and ‫ ـع‬in word-final position). The complexity of the writing system requires additional writing practice for beginning learners of Emirati Arabic grammar who would like to master its writing system. Isolated

Initial

Medial

Final

‫ا‬ ‫ب‬ ‫ت‬ ‫ث‬ ‫ج‬ ‫ح‬ ‫خ‬ ‫د‬ ‫ذ‬

‫ا‬ ‫بـ‬ ‫تـ‬ ‫ثـ‬ ‫جـ‬ ‫حـ‬ ‫خـ‬ ‫د‬ ‫ذ‬

‫ـا‬ ‫ـبـ‬ ‫ـتـ‬ ‫ـثـ‬ ‫ـجـ‬ ‫ـحـ‬ ‫ـخـ‬ ‫ـد‬ ‫ـذ‬

‫ـا‬ ‫ـب‬ ‫ـت‬ ‫ـث‬ ‫ـج‬ ‫ـح‬ ‫ـخ‬ ‫ـد‬ ‫ـذ‬

(Continued)

15

4 Writing System

Isolated

Initial

Medial

Final

‫ر‬ ‫ز‬ ‫س‬ ‫ش‬ ‫ص‬ ‫ض‬ ‫ط‬ ‫ظ‬ ‫ع‬ ‫غ‬ ‫ف‬ ‫ق‬ ‫ك‬ ‫ل‬ ‫م‬ ‫ن‬ ‫ه‬ ‫و‬ ‫ي‬

‫ر‬ ‫ز‬ ‫سـ‬ ‫شـ‬ ‫صـ‬ ‫ضـ‬ ‫طـ‬ ‫ظـ‬ ‫عـ‬ ‫غـ‬ ‫فـ‬ ‫ﻗ‬ ‫كـ‬ ‫لـ‬ ‫مـ‬ ‫نـ‬ ‫هـ‬ ‫و‬ ‫يـ‬

‫ـر‬ ‫ـز‬ ‫ـسـ‬ ‫ـشـ‬ ‫ـصـ‬ ‫ـضـ‬ ‫ـطـ‬ ‫ـظـ‬ ‫ـعـ‬ ‫ـغـ‬ ‫ـفـ‬ ‫ـقـ‬ ‫ـكـ‬ ‫ـلـ‬ ‫ـمـ‬ ‫ـنـ‬ ‫ـهـ‬ ‫ـو‬ ‫ـيـ‬

‫ـر‬ ‫ـز‬ ‫ـس‬ ‫ـش‬ ‫ـص‬ ‫ـض‬ ‫ـط‬ ‫ـظ‬ ‫ـع‬ ‫ـغ‬ ‫ـف‬ ‫ـق‬ ‫ـك‬ ‫ـل‬ ‫ـم‬ ‫ـن‬ ‫ـه‬ ‫ـو‬ ‫ـي‬

The Use of Diacritics Arabic writing is primarily consonantal in the sense that letters only express the consonants, whereas information about vowels that are important for pronunciation is expressed by diacritics, i.e., Fathah َ ‫( ـ‬for [a]) Kasra ِ‫( ـ‬for [i]), and Damma ُ ‫( ـ‬for [u]). In the expression of long vowels, the letters ‫ ا‬or ‫( ى‬for [aa]), ‫( ي‬for [ii]), and ‫و‬ (for [uu]) are used. In addition, the diacritical marks Sukoon and Shadda can also be used to indicate further pronunciation instructions. Letter/Diacritic Sound/Function fathah kasra damma sukoon

16

shaddah ʔalif mamduuda alif maqsˁuura yaa waw

َ‫ـ‬ ِ‫ـ‬ ُ‫ـ‬ ْ‫ـ‬ ّ‫ـ‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ى‬ ‫ي‬ ‫و‬

a i u to indicate the letter is not followed by any vowel doubling consonant [aa] [aa] [ii] [uu]

Example Transcription

‫كـتـ َ ب‬ ‫م ـِ ـن‬ ‫ك ـ ُـت ـ ُـب‬ ‫َم َد ْد‬ ‫ُر ّم ان‬ ‫نهار‬ ‫مشى‬ ‫جميل‬ ‫جلوس‬

kətab min kutub madad rumman nahaar maʃaa dʒamiil dʒuluus

While the expression of diacritics in natural reading contexts (e.g., magazines, novels, signs) is scarce, the omission of diacritics can potentially lead to lexical ambiguity, which may also confuse native readers. For instance, the nondiacriticized word ‫[ جزر‬dʒ-z-r] can have various meanings, distinguished by the use of diacritics:

4 Writing System

‫ َج زَر‬dʒazar carrots ‫ َج َز َر‬dʒazara kill ‫ ُج ُزر‬dʒuzur islands (Plural)

Practice Exercise 4.1 Practice the writing of each of the following Arabic letters:

17

4 Writing System

18

4 Writing System

Exercise 4.2 Write down the following words based on the position of individual letters.

a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

Word

Final

‫دار‬

‫ر‬ ‫ر‬ ‫ب‬ ‫ب‬ ‫ش‬ ‫ب‬ ‫ل‬ ‫د‬

Medial

‫ا‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ا‬

Medial

Initial

‫ا‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ب‬

‫د‬ ‫بـ‬ ‫شـ‬ ‫ح‬ ‫ر‬ ‫ض‬ ‫ع‬ ‫ر‬

‫ش‬ ‫ب‬ ‫ق‬ ‫غ‬

19

4

Exercise 4.3

Writing System

Please identify the individual letters of the following words.

‫ع ب ق عبق‬ a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

20

‫رابع‬ ‫طالل‬ ‫عبق‬ ‫كسب‬ ‫رمس‬ ‫بندر‬ ‫لملم‬ ‫حصن‬

UNIT 5 Word Formation

The study of word formation belongs to the linguistic component of Morphology. It mainly investigates the processes and mechanisms through which words are formed, frequently by the combination of different basic units, called morphemes. For instance, the English word ‘dogs’ consists of two morphemes, i.e., ‘dog’ as a free morpheme (because it can stand on its own) and the plural suffix ‘-s’ as a bound morpheme (because it must be bound to the base). Emirati Arabic differs significantly from English (and other European languages) in word formation processes. The so-called base of Emirati Arabic words is generally understood to be the consonantal root, which almost always consists of three consonants (though roots consisting of two or four consonants exist). One productive word-formation process, typical of Arabic and other Semitic languages, is to create new words by mapping this consonantal root to a particular vocalic pattern (see Units 7–16 for more details). This morphological process is non-concatenative (non-linear) since words are not created by adding a morpheme before or after the base. On the other hand, concatenative morphology is a process through which morphemes are added before or after the base (linear). For example, in Emirati Arabic verb conjugation is formed by prefixes and/or suffixes, which represent subject number, gender, and person. I break. ‫ أكسر‬ʔa-ksər You break. ‫ تكسر‬tə-ksər ‫ تكسرين‬tə-ksər-iin You (f)

‫ يكسر‬jə-ksər ‫ تكسر‬tə-ksər

break. He breaks. She breaks.

We break. ‫ نكسر‬nə-ksər ‫ تكسرون‬tə-ksər-uun You (pl) break. ‫ يكسرون‬jə-ksər-uun They break.

‫ يكسرن‬jə-ksər-ən

They (f) break.

Affixation is also commonly used in other grammatical categories, e.g., nouns. The following examples show how various affixes express gender and number information on the noun.

21

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-5

‫ة‬- -a(h)

5

feminine (sg)

Word Formation

masculine (pl)

‫ين‬-

feminine (pl)

‫ات‬-

masculine (du)

‫ين‬-

feminine (du)

‫تين‬-

‫إستاذة‬ ‫مهندسة‬ -iin ‫مهندسين‬ ‫مساعدين‬ -aat ‫مبتدئات‬ ‫معلمات‬ -een ‫معلّ مين‬ ‫طالبين‬ -teen ‫حرمتين‬ ‫عاملتين‬

ʔəstaaða mhandəsa muhandəsiin musaaʕdiin mubtadiʔaat mʕalmaat mʕallmeen tˤaalˤbeen ħərməteen ʕaaməlteen

professor (f) engineer (f) engineers assistants beginners teachers two teachers two students two women two workers (f)

Other affixes derive other lexical items:

‫ياباني‬ ‫مصري‬ ‫وي‬- -wii ‫شرجاوي‬ ‫م ّك اوي‬ ‘unit’ -a ‫ة‬‫ت فّ احة‬ ‫بصلة‬ future modal -‫ ﺑ‬b‫بيي‬ ‫بسير‬ possessive pronoun ‫يا‬/‫ي‬- -i ‫كتابي‬ ‫ك‬- -(ə)k ‫كتابك‬

‘noun of origin’

‫ي‬- -ii

jaabaani masˁri ʃaardʒaawi makkaawi təffaaħa bsˁala baji basiir ktaabi ktaabək

Japanese Egyptian Sharjah people Mecca people a piece of apple a piece of onion I will come I will go my book your book

Other word-formation processes include reduplication, loanwords, abbreviations, blending, and back formation. reduplication

loanwords

abbreviation back formation 22

‫وحدة وحدة‬ ‫كلمة كلمة‬ ‫بيت بيت‬ ‫كيك‬ ‫سندويتش‬ ‫قالص‬ ‫اوكيه‬ ‫برب‬ ‫كوفي‬ ‫فاب‬ ‫أديب‬ ‫ألمان‬

wəħda wəħda kəlma kəlma beet beet keek sandəwiiʧ glˤaasˤ okeeh bərəb kofi faab adiib ʔalmaan

each one word by word each house cake sandwich glass Okay BRB (Be right back) coffee FAB (First Abu Dhabi Bank) ADIB (Abu Dhabi Islamic Bank) German (from ‫[ ألمانيا‬ʔalmaanja] Germany)

Practice

5

Exercise 5.1

Word Formation

Guess the meaning of the following loanwords. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m.

‫بوت‬ ‫جرج‬ ‫ميكب‬ ‫بوفيه‬ ‫بنك‬ ‫اسكريم‬ ‫باسوورد‬ ‫ستامب‬ ‫سوبرماركت‬ ‫فال‬ ‫باركن‬ ‫كمبيوتر‬ ‫فيسبوك‬

buut ʧarʧ meekab boofeeh bank ʔaskəriim baaswoord stamb suubərmaarkət fəlla baarkən kambjuutar feesbuk

23

UNIT 6 Nouns

Nouns are words that denote persons, things, places, abstract ideas, and so on. In Emirati Arabic, nouns are inflected for number, gender, and definiteness.

Gender Emirati Arabic nouns can be masculine or feminine. Masculine nouns do not carry any special morphology, whereas feminine nouns are usually (but not always) marked with the suffix ‫– ة‬a(t), which is generally left unpronounced word-finally. The following table provides some examples of masculine and feminine nouns: Masculine

‫صديق‬ ‫عامل‬ ‫نادل‬ ‫موظف‬ ‫اخصائي‬ ‫كاتب‬ ‫دريول‬ ‫مريض‬

Feminine sˤadiiq ʕaaməl naadəl mwadˤdˤaf ʔaxəsˤsˤaaʔi kaatəb dreewəl məriiðˤ

‫صديقة‬ ‫عاملة‬ ‫نادلة‬ ‫موظفة‬ ‫اخصائية‬ ‫كاتبة‬ ‫دريولية‬ ‫مريضة‬

sˤadiiqah ʕaaməlah naadəlah mwadˤdˤafah ʔaxəsˤsˤaaʔijjah kaatəbah dreewəlijja məriiðˤa

friend worker waiter officer specialist writer driver patient

Some feminine nouns may not be marked with an affix. Their feminine status shows as a gender and number agreement marker on the adjective or verb. Some examples of such unmarked nouns are ‫ عيون‬ʕjuun ‘eyes’, ‫ إيد‬ʔiid ‘hand’, and ‫ريل‬ riil ‘foot’. All inanimate broken plural nouns are feminine.

Number 24

Number in Emirati Arabic is expressed as singular (denoting a single noun entity), dual (denoting two entities), and plural (for more than two entities). The singular does not have any additional morphology, while the dual is expressed by a suffix,

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-6

and the plural can be expressed in two ways: some plural nouns are formed using suffixes (‘sound plurals’), whereas others are formed in a ‘non-linear’ fashion, i.e., by using specific sequences of vowels, which intertwine with the root consonants in the noun (‘broken plurals’). For sound plurals, the masculine and feminine nouns end with suffixes, which express gender and number features simultaneously. For masculine nouns, plurals are marked by the suffix ‫– ين‬iin, while feminine plurals are suffixed by ‫– ات‬aat: Singular

‫طباخ‬ ‫ممثل‬ ‫عطار‬ ‫كذاب‬

6 Nouns

Plural

tˤabbaax mumaθθəl ʕatˤtˤaar tʃaððaab

‫طباخين‬ ‫ممثلين‬ ‫عطارين‬ ‫كذابين‬

tˤabbaxiin mumaθθəliin ʕatˤtˤaariin tʃaððaabiin

Singular

‫سماعة‬ ‫نظارة‬ ‫حناية‬ ‫ملكة‬

cooks(s) actor(s) traditional medicine seller(s) liar(s)

Plural sammaaʕa naðˤðˤaara ħannaaja maləka

‫سماعات‬ ‫نظارات‬ ‫حنايات‬ ‫ملكات‬

sammaaʕaat naðˤðˤaaraat ħannaajaat maləkaat

headphone(s) glass(es) henna artist(s) queen(s)

The dual is formed by the suffix ‫– ين‬een for masculine nouns and ‫ تين‬-teen for feminine nouns: Singular

‫طباخ‬ ‫ممثل‬ ‫عطار‬ ‫فنيان‬

Dual

tˤabbaax mumaθθəl ʕatˤtˤaar fənjaan

‫طباخين‬ ‫ممثلين‬ ‫عطارين‬ ‫فنيانين‬

Singular

‫سماعة‬ ‫نظارة‬ ‫علبة‬ ‫عاملة‬

tˤabbaaxeen mumaθθəleen ʕatˤtˤaareen fənjaaneen

(two) cookers (two) actors (two) medicine sellers (two) coffee cups

Dual sammaaʕa naðˤðˤaara ʕəlbah ʕaaməlah

‫سماعتين‬ ‫نظارتين‬ ‫علبتين‬ ‫عاملتين‬

sammaʕteen naðˤðˤaarteen ʕəlbəteen ʕaaməlteen

(two) headphone(s) (two) glass(es) (two) box(es) (two) worker(s)

The ‘broken plural’, as we have said, is formed by mapping the noun root consonants, as used in the singular, with a different vowel sequence. Take for example the singular form of the word ‫ حمار‬ħmaar for ‘donkey’. In order to form the plural, we isolate the consonants of the singular form ħ-m-r (this is termed a ‘consonantal root’ in formal grammar), and we apply the vowel sequence CCiiC (where C stands for any consonant in the root), yielding the plural form ‫ حمير‬ħmiir ‘donkeys’. There are

25

several different patterns (root consonant-vowel sequence combinations) that derive broken plurals. Some examples are given in the following table:

6 Nouns

Pattern

Singular

‫ط راد‬ ‫منحل‬ ‫جار‬ ‫نخلة‬

CaCaaCiiC CəCaaCiC CiiCaaC CaCaC

tˤarraad manħal jaar naxlah

Plural

‫ط راريد‬ ‫مناحل‬ ‫جي ران‬ ‫نخل‬

tˤaraariid mənaaħəl jiiraan naxal

boat(s) bee farm(s) neighbor(s) palm tree(s)

Definiteness Emirati Arabic nouns may be marked with the prefix - ‫ اﻟ‬əl- ‘the’ when they are interpreted as definite or specific, for example, when they refer to something that has been established before in the discourse. When the first consonant of the noun is one of [t, d, θ, ð, tʕ, ðʕ, s, z, sʕ, ʃ, n, r, l], the [l] of the prefix changes to become the same as that consonant. The letters corresponding to these consonants are traditionally termed ‘sun’ letters (‫ حروف شمسية‬ħuruuf ʃamsijjah) in Arabic grammar as opposed to all other consonants that are termed ‘moon’ letters (‫ حروف قمرية‬ħuruuf qamarijjah), and which do not trigger the change:

Sun Letters ‫الشمس‬ ‫الذنوب‬ ‫الدوام‬

əʃʃams

the sun

əððənuub

the sins

əddəwaam

the work shift

Moon Letters the eggs ‫ البيض‬əlbeeðʕ əlʔawraag the papers ‫األوراق‬ ǝlaglaam the pens ‫االقالم‬

Practice Glossary

‫ ممرض‬mumarrədˤ ‫ معلم‬məʕalləm ‫ قصير‬gəsˁiir 26

‫ طويل‬tˤəwiil ‫ لعبة‬ləʕba ‫ طفل‬tˤəfəl

nurse teacher short

‫ كلب‬kalb ‫ طباخ‬tˤabbaax ‫ سماعة‬sammaaʕa

tall toy baby

‫ فنجان‬fənjaan ‫ مهندس‬məhandəs ‫ ممثل‬mumaθθəl

dog cook (noun) earphone/ speaker coffee cup engineer actor

‫ أسد‬ʔasad ‫ وسيم‬wasiim ‫ جميل‬dʒamiil ‫طفلة‬ ‫باب‬ ‫ايد‬ ‫حواجب‬ ‫عين‬ ‫عم‬ ‫حلو‬ ‫خايسة‬ ‫مهندسين‬ ‫دكتورة‬ ‫دكاترة‬ ‫دكتورات‬ ‫مسطرة‬ ‫تسطر‬ ‫مقهى‬ ‫من وقت‬ ‫عندنا‬

tˤəfla baab ʔiid ħawaadʒəb ʕeen ʕamm ħəlu xaajsa məhandesiin dəktoora dəkaatra dəktoraat məstˁara tsˤatˤtˤər maqha mən wagt ʕəndəna

lion handsome beautiful babygirl door hand eyebrows eye uncle pretty/ beautiful ugly (f) engineers doctor (f) doctors doctors (f) ruler underlining coffee shop on time we have

‫ والعة‬wallaaʕa ‫ اشتريت‬ʔəʃtəret ‫ حلوة‬ħəlwa ‫حق‬ ‫عقل‬ ‫ابوي‬ ‫اخواني‬ ‫كلهم‬ ‫مسكر‬ ‫خاالتي‬

ħagg ʕagəl ʔəbuuj ʔəxwaani kəllhum msakkar xaalaati

lighter I bought pretty/ beautiful (f) for brain my dad my brothers all of them closed my aunts

‫مهندسة‬ ‫المقص‬ ‫خدامتنا‬ ‫اليديدة‬ ‫كانت‬ ‫فتح‬ ‫الزم‬

məhandəsa əlməgasˤ xaddaamatna əljədiida kaanat fətaħ laazəm

engineer (f) the scissor our nanny the new (f) was (f) opened must/should

6 Nouns

Exercise 6.1 Provide the corresponding feminine forms of the following masculine nouns. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

‫طبيب‬ ‫مهندس‬ ‫موظف‬ ‫طباخ‬ ‫ممثل‬ ‫ممرض‬ ‫معلم‬ ‫قصير‬

tˤabiib muhandəs muwaðˤðˤaf tˤabbaax mumaθθəl mumarrədˤ məʕalləm gəsˁiir

doctor engineer officer cook actor nurse teacher short

Exercise 6.2 For each of the following nouns, specify if they are masculine (M) or feminine (F). a. b. c. d. e. f.

‫درس‬ ‫موظفة‬ ‫مترجمة‬ ‫مسيد‬ ‫بَ طَ ل‬ ‫زميلة‬

dars muwadˁdˁafah mutardʒəmah məsiid batˤalˤ zamiila

lecture employee translator mosque hero colleague

M M M M M M

F F F F F F

27

g. h. i.

6 Nouns

‫جبن‬ ‫طالبة‬ ‫طيار‬

dʒəbən tˤaaləba tˤajjaar

cheese student pilot

M M M

F F F

Exercise 6.3 Provide the plural forms for the following singular nouns (notice that some nouns are masculine, whereas others are feminine): a. b. c. d. e.

‫سائق‬ ‫سماعة‬ ‫مبتدئة‬ ‫محاسب‬ ‫تاجرة‬

saajəg sammaaʕa mubtadəʔa mħaasəb taadʒəra

driver earphone beginner accountant trader (f)

Exercise 6.4 Provide the dual forms for the following singular nouns (notice that some of the nouns are masculine and some feminine): a. b. c. d. e.

‫مترجمة‬ ‫زميلة‬ ‫مستشار‬ ‫سائح‬ ‫سيارة‬

mutardʒəma zamiila mustaʃaar saajəh sajjaara

translator colleague consultant tourist car

Exercise 6.5 Provide the definite (prefixed) forms for the following nouns. a. b. c. d. e.

‫صرصور‬ ‫ستارة‬ ‫لوحة‬ ‫نجم‬ ‫درس‬

sˤarsˤuur sətaara looħa nadʒm dars

cockroach curtain painting star lesson

Exercise 6.6 Choose whether the following nouns begin with sun letters (S) or moon letters (M).

28

a. b. c. d. e.

‫قمر‬ ‫شمس‬ ‫دوام‬ ‫ورق‬ ‫مقص‬

gəmar ʃams dəwaam warag məgasˤ

moon sun work papers scissor

S S S S S

M M M M M

Exercise 6.7

6

Choose the correct form to fill the gap in the following sentences. 1.

2.

____ ‫عندي‬ ‫سماعة‬ ‫سماعتين‬ ‫سماعات‬

a. b. c.

‫يابت____األكل للزبون‬ ‫النادل‬ ‫النادلة‬ ‫النادالت‬

a. b. c. 3.

ʕəndi ____ sammaaʕa sammaaʕteen sammaaʕaat

‫شفت____ المدرسة اليوم‬ ‫زميلة‬ ‫زميلتين‬ ‫زميالت‬

a. b. c.

Nouns

I have two headphones.

jaabat ____ əlʔakəl ləzzabuun ənnaadəl ənnaadla ənnaadlaat tʒəft ____ əlmadrəsa əljoom zamiila zamiilteen zamiilaat

The waitress brought the food to the customer.

I saw my school colleagues (f) today.

Exercise 6.8 Determine whether the following nouns are masculine (M) or feminine (F) and write their plural forms. a. b. c. d. e.

‫طباخ‬ ‫سماعة‬ ‫فنجان‬ ‫مهندس‬ ‫والعة‬

tˤabbaax sammaaʕa fənjaan məhandəs wallaaʕa

Exercise 6.9 Choose whether the following nouns are feminine or masculine duals. a. b. c. d.

‫طباخين‬ ‫ممثلتين‬ ‫سماعتين‬ ‫حنايتين‬

e.

‫سيارتين‬

tˤabbaaxiin mumaθθəlteen sammaʕteen ħannaajteen sajjaarteen

cooks two actors two earphones two henna appliers two cars

F F F F

M M M M

F

M 29

UNIT 7 Pronouns

The term ‘pronoun’, e.g., English ‘he’, ‘she’, etc., is normally used to refer to an entity (e.g., persons, objects, or locations) that has been established in the discourse. There are different subclasses of pronouns, depending on their function in the sentence and their properties. Thus, most grammatical systems contain pronominal forms categorized as personal (e.g., ‘he’, ‘him’, etc.), reflexive (e.g., ‘myself’, ‘themselves’, etc.), possessive (e.g., ‘my’, ‘his’, etc.), and demonstrative (e.g., ‘this’, ‘that’, etc.).

Personal Pronouns Personal pronouns are free in the sense that they exist independently in the sentence. As with many other languages, their forms depend on the person (i.e., first, second, or third), number (i.e., singular or plural), and gender (i.e., masculine or feminine) specifications of their referent. Singular First person Second person masculine Second person feminine Third person masculine Third person feminine

‫أنا‬ ‫إنت‬ ‫إنتي‬ ‫هو‬ ‫هي‬

ʔana ʔǝnt(a) ʔǝnti huu hii

Plural

‫نحن‬ ‫إنتوا‬ ‫إنتن‬ ‫هم‬ ‫هن‬

nǝħǝn ʔǝntu(m) ʔǝntǝn hum hǝn

It should be noted that Emirati Arabic subject pronouns are usually optional, which is different from English. The identity of unpronounced subject pronouns can always be deduced by looking at the verb form. The following sentences are usually uttered without using an actual subject pronoun:

30

He broke the glass. ‫ هو كسر لقالص‬huu kǝsar ləglaasˤ hii ǝʃtǝrat ǝlha ʃantˤah She bought a bag. ‫هي اشترت لها شنطة‬ ‫ هم كلو في المطعم‬hum kalaw filmatˤʕam They ate in the restaurant.

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-7

In some cases, the subject pronoun can be explicitly mentioned to serve some functions, e.g., emphasis:

7 Pronouns

‫ أنا؟‬،‫ هاذي فلوسي‬haaði fluusi, ʔana! This is my money, (me)!

Object Pronouns Object pronouns are different from subject pronouns in that they must be bound to a stem (e.g., a verb or a preposition) and are not omissible. 1st pers. 2nd pers. masc 2nd pers. fem 3rd pers. masc 3rd pers. masc pl

‫ني‬‫ك‬‫ج‬‫ﻪ‬‫ﻬم‬-

-ni -(ə)k -(ə)ʧ -a/-ah -hum

3rd pers. fem 1st pers. pl 2nd pers. masc pl 2nd pers. fem pl 3rd pers. fem pl

‫ﻬا‬‫نا‬‫كم‬‫كن‬‫ﻬن‬-

-ha -na -kum -kən -hin/-hən

Demonstrative Pronouns Demonstrative pronouns have different forms depending on the distance between the speaker and the object (cf. English ‘this’ vs. ‘that’) and number (cf. ‘this’ vs. ‘these’).

‫ها‬/‫هذا‬ ‫هاي‬ ‫هذاك‬ ‫هاذيج‬/‫هاييج‬ ‫هذا الريال‬ ‫هذاك الريال‬ ‫هذول الرياييل‬/‫هذيال‬ ‫هذيالك الرياييل‬ ‫هذي الحرمة‬ ‫هذيك الحرمة‬ ‫هذول الحريم‬/‫هذيال‬ ‫هاذيالك الحريم‬ ‫هاييل‬/‫هذيل‬/‫ها‬ ‫هاييل‬/‫هذيل‬/‫ها‬ ‫هاييل‬/‫هذيل‬/‫ها‬ ‫هاييل‬/‫هذيل‬ ‫هذا التلفون‬ ‫هذاك التلفون‬ ‫هذول التلفونات‬/‫هذيال‬ ‫هذيالك التلفونات‬ ‫هذي الصورة‬ ‫هذيك الصورة‬ ‫هذول الصور‬/‫هذيال‬ ‫هذيالك الصور‬

haaða/haahaaj haaðaak haaðiiʧ/haajiiʧ haaða əlrajjaal haðaak əlrajjaal haaðool(a)/haaðeela əlrjaajiil haaðeelaak əlrjaajiil haaði əlħərma haaðiik əlħərma haaðoola/haaðeela əlħəriim haðeelaak əlħəriim ha/haaðeel/haajeel ha-, haðeel/hajeel haaðeelaak/haajeelak haaðeel(a)/haajeel(a) haaða əttǝlǝfoon haaðaak əttǝlǝfoon haaðool(a)/haaðeela əttǝlǝfoonaat haaðeelaak əttǝlǝfoonaat haaði əsˤsˤuura haaðiik əsˤsˤuura haaðoola/haaðeela əsˤsˤuwar haðeelaak əsˤsˤuwar

this this (f) that that (f) this man that man these men those men this woman that woman these women those women these these (f) those those (f) this phone that phone these phones those phones this (f) picture that (f) picture these (f) pictures those (f) pictures

31

Practice

7 Pronouns

Glossary

‫دريشة‬ ‫سيارة‬ ‫حديقة‬ ‫بلد‬ ‫شجرة‬ ‫عاملة‬ /‫موظفة‬ ‫سيف‬ ‫شهر‬ ‫بحر‬ ‫قلم‬

driiʃah sajjaarah ħadiiqah balad ʃǝjarah muwaðˤðˤafah/ ʕaaməlah seef ʃahar baħar galam

‫معلمة‬ ‫باحثة‬ ‫طباخة‬ ‫نمر‬ ‫حصان‬ ‫عامل‬

window (f) car (f) garden (f) country (f) tree (f) worker (f)

‫رجل أعمال‬ ‫بعير‬ ‫نهر‬ ‫كتاب‬

sword month sea pen

mʕallmah baaħəθah tˤabbaaxah nəmər ħsˤaan ʕaməl

teacher (f) researcher (f) chef (f) tiger (m) horse worker

radʒul ʔaʕmaal bəʕiir nahər ktaab

businessman camel river book

Exercise 7.1 Fill in the blanks based on the words provided.

‫أنا‬ ‫إنت‬ ‫إنتي‬ ‫هو‬ ‫هي‬ ‫نحن‬ ‫إنتوا‬ ‫إنتن‬ ‫هم‬ ‫هن‬

ʔana ʔənta ʔənti huu hii nəħən ʔəntu ʔəntən hum hən

meaning

number

gender

‘I’

singular

m/f

Exercise 7.2 Fill in the blanks based on the words provided.

32

‫هذا‬ ‫هاي\هاذي‬ ‫هذيل‬ ‫هذاك‬ ‫هاذيج‬ ‫هذيالك‬

haaða haaj/haðii haaðeel haaðaak haaðiiʧ haaðeelaak

meaning

number

gender

close to speaker?

‘this’

singular

masculine

yes

Exercise 7.3

7

Translate the following English expressions into Emirati Arabic.

Pronouns

a. this pen b. that sea c. these months d. those rivers e. this window f. that (female) teacher g. these countries h. those trees

Exercise 7.4 Translate the following Emirati Arabic expressions into English. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.

‫هاذيالك البنات‬ ‫هاذيج الحرمة‬ ‫هذاك الريال‬ ‫هذيل الكنادير‬ ‫هذا الدفتر‬ ‫هاذي‬/‫هاي‬ ‫النعال‬ ‫هاذيج السيارة‬ ‫هذا الجواز‬ ‫هذيل النخل‬ ‫هذاك الطيار‬

haaðeelaak əlbanaat haaðiiʧ əlħərmah haaðaak ərrajjaal haaðeel əlkanaadiir haaða əddaftar haaj/haaðii ənnʕaal haaðiiʧ əssajjaara haaða əlʤawaaz haaðeel ənnaxal haaðaak ətˤtˤajjaar

33

UNIT 8 Form I Verbs

As in MSA and other Arabic dialects, Emirati Arabic verbs appear in different shapes, called Forms, and numbered from I to X using Latin numerals. The verb forms in MSA and Emirati Arabic are very similar, in the sense that they share comparable templates (i.e., a fixed combination of root consonants and vowels). A notable difference lies in some of the vowels used in the templates. In addition, Form IV, which is attested in MSA, is not used in Emirati Arabic. The simplest form of verbs is Form I, which contains the consonantal root of the verb and has the vowel [i], in most cases reduced to [ə] after the first consonant. For readers interested in linguistics and phonology, Form I verbs can be summarized by the template CVCVC (C: consonant; V: vowel). Form I verbs can have a variety of meanings, as in the following examples (note: the root consonants in Arabic script are written from right to left):1 Root

‫ب‬-‫ذ‬-‫ك‬ ‫ح‬-‫س‬-‫م‬ ‫ع‬-‫ج‬-‫ر‬ ‫ق‬-‫ر‬-‫س‬ ‫ب‬-‫ر‬-‫ظ‬ ‫ل‬-‫س‬-‫غ‬ ‫خ‬-‫ب‬-‫ط‬ ‫د‬-‫ر‬-‫ش‬

34

Form I k-ð-b m-s-ħ r-ʤ-ʕ s-r-g ðˤ - r - b ɣ-s-l tˤ - b - x ʃ-r-d

‫كذب‬ ‫مسح‬ ‫رجع‬ ‫سرق‬ ‫ظرب‬ ‫غسل‬ ‫طبخ‬ ‫شرد‬

kəðab lied məsaħ deleted rəʤaʕ came back sərag

stole

ðˤarab hit ɣəsal

washed

tˤəbax cooked ʃərad

ran away

In the examples provided, verbs are listed with third-person masculine singular agreement, which corresponds to the least marked form of the verb. For example, the Form I verb ‫ ضرب‬ðˤarab actually means ‘he hit’, as this is unmarked with no additional morphology. This is also the reason the meaning of all ‘basic verbs’ (e.g., those you will see in the glossary) is in the past tense/perfective aspect, e.g., the basic word ‫ فعل‬fəʕal means ‘did/made’ (not ‘do/make’). Other subject agreements can be used, which will be illustrated in other units. The following is a list of verbs derived from the consonant root ‫ب‬-‫ر‬-‫ ظ‬ðˤ-r-b ‘hit’:

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-8

‫ظربت‬ ‫ظربت‬ ‫ظربتي‬ ‫ظرب‬

ðˤarabt ðˤərabt ðˤərabti ðˤərab

I hit You hit You (f) hit He hit

‫ظربت‬ ‫ظربنا‬ ‫ظربوا‬ ‫ظربن‬

ðˤərbat ðˤərabna ðˤərbaw ðˤərbən

She hit We hit They hit They (f) hit

8 Form I Verbs

Examples ‫ أنت دفنت الصقر بيدك‬Ɂənt dəfant əlsˁagər ‫اخوي غطس في البحر‬ ‫ثالث م رات‬ ‫يدتي فتحت باب‬ ‫السعادة علينا‬ ‫عزمت مريم ربيعتها‬ ‫لعب محمد مع أخوه‬ ‫الصغير‬ ‫صاح الولد جدام‬ ‫الريايل‬

biidək Ɂuxuui ɣətˤas f əlbaħr θalaaθ mərraat jaddəti fətħat baab əssaʕaada ʕaleenaa ʕəzmat marjam rǝbiiʕtha ləʕab mħammad maʕa ʔǝxuuh əsˁsˁǝɣiijr sˁaaħ əlwalad dʒǝddaam əlrjajiil

You buried the falcon with your hands. My brother dived into the sea three times. My grandmother opened the happiness door for us. Maryam invited her friend. Mohammad played with his younger brother. The boy cried in front of the men.

Practice Glossary

‫فعل‬ ‫مزر‬ ‫صاح‬ ‫مشى‬ ‫ركض‬ ‫جا‬ ‫نام‬ ‫نظّ ف‬ ‫تعلّ م‬ ‫عرف‬ ‫نسي‬ ‫كتب‬ ‫شاف‬/‫ناظر‬ ‫شاف‬ ّ‫أحب‬ ‫اشترى‬ ‫بغى‬ ‫راح‬ ‫رواية‬ ‫جتل‬

fəʕal məzar sˁaaħ məʃa rəkaðˤ jaa naam naðˤðˤaf tʕallam ʕaraf nəsa kətab naaðˤar/ tʃaaf tʃaaf ħabb eʃtara bəɣa raaħ rəwaaja dʒətal

did/made filled cried walked ran came slept cleaned learned knew forgot wrote saw watched loved bought wanted to went novel killed

‫عفد‬ ‫جلس‬ ‫طاح‬ ‫طبخ‬ ‫أكل‬ ‫شرب‬ ‫وعى‬ ‫غسل‬ ‫درس‬ ‫فهم‬ ‫تذكر‬ ‫ق را‬ ‫قال‬ ‫لقى‬ ‫سمع‬ ‫كره‬ ‫باع‬ ّ ‫ظن‬ ‫جاف‬/‫شاف‬ ‫فلم‬

ʕəfad jəlas tˤaaħ tˤəbax Ɂakal ʃərab wəʕaa ɣassal dəras fəham tðakkar gara gaal ləgaa səmaʕ kərah baaʕ ðˤann tʃaaf fəlm

jumped sat fell cooked ate drank woke washed studied understood remembered read said found heard hated sold thought saw/watch movie

35

‫زقر‬ ‫ترس‬ ‫رفس‬ ‫هزب‬ ‫فلع‬ ‫عاف‬ ‫حشر‬

8 Form I Verbs

zəgar təras rəfas həzab fəlaʕ ʕaaf ħəʃar

called filled kicked scolded hit detested annoyed

‫كمبيوتر‬ ‫قالص‬ ‫أغنية‬ ‫كتاب‬ ‫غرفة‬ ‫ياهل‬

kambjuutar glˤaasˤ Ɂəɣnija kətaab ɣərfa jaahəl

computer glass song book room baby/kid

Exercise 8.1 Translate the following Emirati Arabic sentences in English. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

‫مريم قرت الرواية‬ ‫علي شاف الفلم‬ ‫موزة اشترت الكتاب‬ ‫شيخة باعت الكمبيوتر‬ ‫محمد نظّ ف الغرفة‬ ‫سالم كسر القالص‬ ‫نورة مسكت الياهل‬ ‫خليفة سمع أغنية‬

marjam garat ərrəwaaja ʕəli tʃaaf fəlm mooza əʃtarat əlkətaab ʃeexa baaʕat əlkambjuutar mħammad naðˤðˤaf əlɣərfa saaləm kəsar əlglˤaasˤ nuura məskat əljaahəl xəliifa səmaʕ Ɂəɣnija

Exercise 8.2 Translate the following English sentences in Emirati Arabic (using Form I verbs). Note that some Emirati Arabic sentences may not require a pronoun, especially if the verb agreement clearly informs its identity. The verb form should also agree with the sentence subject (see Units 7 and 31 for more information).

a. They detested the restaurant. b. Maitha called the housekeeper. c. My brother annoyed me. d. I loved the cat. e. I filled the coffee cup. f. The camel kicked his herdsman. g. He jumped the school fence. h. My mom scolded the housemaid.

Note

36

1 Some roots that consist of what linguists call ‘weak’ consonants (e.g., ‫[ ا‬ʔ], ‫[ و‬w], and ‫[ ي‬j]) will derive verb forms, which have slightly different spelling and pronunciation. The examples and practice questions on verb forms may consist of some of these examples for the readers’ reference. For more detailed discussion, readers can consult Emirati Arabic: A Comprehensive Grammar (Routledge, 2021).

UNIT 9 Form II Verbs

Form II is typically expressed by doubling the second (middle) consonant of the root consonant. In general, Form II verbs are causative (i.e., cause someone to do X, or cause something to become X) or intensifying (i.e., strengthening the verb). ّ ‫و‬ For instance, the adjective ‫ وصخ‬wəsʕax means ‘dirty’, while the Form II verb ‫ص خ‬ wasʕsʕax means ‘made (something) dirty.’ The meaning of many Form II verbs can stem from their Form I verb counterparts, though some Form II verbs may not stem from any Form I verbs. Root

‫ك‬-‫ح‬-‫ض‬ ‫ر‬-‫ك‬-‫ذ‬ ‫ل‬-‫ع‬-‫ز‬ ‫ح‬-‫ي‬-‫ص‬

Form II ð -ħ-k ð-k-r z-ʕ-l sʕ - j - ħ ʕ

‫ض ّح ك‬ ‫ذ ّك ر‬ ‫ز ّع ل‬ ‫ص يّح‬

ðʕaħħak ðakkar zaʕʕal sʕajjaħ

made s.o. laugh made s.o. remember made s.o. sad made s.o. cry

The following examples illustrate the use of Form II verbs in different contexts:

‫ الجامعة ط وّلت اإلجازة‬əlʤaamʕa tˤawwəlat ‫فاطمة ذ ّك رت مريم‬ ‫تحل الواجب‬ ‫أحمد ّزعل فاطمة‬ ‫شيماء ض ّح كت مهرة‬ ‫الولد ص يّح البنت‬

əlʔəʤaaza faatʕma ðakkərat marjam ətħəll elwaaʤəb ʔaħmad zaʕʕal faatʕma ʃajmaa ðʕaħħəkat mahra əlwəlad sʕajjaħ əlbənt

The university extended the vacation. Fatma reminded Mariam to do the homework. Ahmed made Fatma sad. Shaimaa made Mahra laugh. The boy made the girl cry.

Practice Glossary

‫خ رّب‬ ‫خلّ ص‬ ‫ل ّع ب‬ ‫ط وّل‬

xarrab xallasʕ laʕʕab tʕawwal

ruined finished made s.o play extended

‫كورة‬ ‫سيارة‬ ‫الصاله‬ ‫البر‬

koorah sajjaarah əsʕsʕaalʕah əlbarr

ball car living room desert

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-9

37

‫ذ ّك ر‬ ‫ي ّدد‬ ‫زعالن‬ ‫وقّ ف‬ ‫ن ّش ف‬ ‫خ يّم‬ ّ ‫و‬ ‫صخ‬ ‫ش ّغ ل‬

9 Form II Verbs

ðakkar jaddad zaʕlaan waggaf naʃʃaf xajjam wasʕsʕax ʃaɣɣaal

reminded renewed sad stopped dried camped staining switched on/ made s.th. work

‫واجب‬ ‫صحون‬ ‫الولد‬ ‫الس ّخ ان‬

waaʤəb sʕuħuun əlwəlad əssaxxaan

homework dishes the boy the heater

Exercise 9.1 For the following root meaning, state their Form II and guess their meaning. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.

‫ر‬-‫ص‬-‫ق‬ ‫ع‬-‫ل‬-‫ط‬ ‫ب‬-‫ر‬-‫خ‬ ‫ف‬-‫ظ‬-‫ن‬ ‫ل‬-‫ز‬-‫ن‬ ‫م‬-‫و‬-‫ن‬ ‫ر‬-‫س‬-‫ك‬ ‫ش‬-‫ن‬-‫ف‬ ‫ر‬-‫و‬-‫ع‬ ‫د‬-‫د‬-‫ي‬

g - sˤ - r tˤ - l - ʕ x-r-b n - ðˤ - f n-z-l n-w-m k-s-r f-n-ʃ ʕ-w-r j-d-d

short went out bad clean go down sleep break end of service pain new

Exercise 9.2 Translate the following Emirati Arabic sentences into English. a. b. c. d. e. f.

‫أحمد ّزعل فاطمة‬ ‫علي خ رّب السيارة‬ ّ ‫سرور و‬ ‫ص خ الصاله‬ ‫عمر ي ّدد السيارة‬ ‫أبو محمد درّس ولده‬ ‫حسن خلّ ص الواجب‬

ʔaħmad zaʕʕal faatʕma ʕəli xarrab əssəjjaara səruur wasʕsʕax əsʕsʕaalʕah ʕumar jaddaad əssəjjaara ʔubuu mħammad darras wəldah ħasan xalʕlʕasʕ əlwaaədʒeb

Exercise 9.3 Translate the following English sentences into Emirati Arabic using Form II verbs.

38



a. Ahmed made Fatma sad. b. Khalid stopped the car. c. Hasan cleaned the living room. d. Hamid took the boy out. e. Omar dried the dishes. f. Ali switched the heater on.

UNIT 10 Form III Verbs

Form III verbs are characterized by lengthening the vowel after the first root ­consonant. For instance, the root ‫ ب‬-‫ و‬-‫ ج‬ʤ-w-b bears the general concept of ‘answering’, and its corresponding Form III verb ‫ جاوب‬ʤaawab means ‘answered to someone’. Form III verbs usually (but not always) introduce an additional indirect object of the verb and associate the verbal action with a participant. Root

Form III

‫ب‬-‫و‬-‫ج‬ ‫خ‬-‫ر‬-‫ص‬ ‫ر‬-‫ف‬-‫س‬ ‫ع‬-‫ز‬-‫ن‬ ‫ب‬-‫ع‬-‫ل‬ ‫ب‬-‫ر‬-‫ض‬

ʤ-w-b sˤ - r - x s-f-r n-z-ʕ l-ʕ-b ðˤ - r - b

‫علي العب أخوه‬ ‫محمد نازع ربيعه في‬ ‫الجامعة‬ ‫الطالب جاوبوا في الحصة‬ ‫الريال سافر أمس‬ ‫حمدة كاسرت البياع‬

‫جاوب‬ ‫صارخ‬ ‫سافر‬ ‫نازع‬ ‫العب‬ ‫ضارب‬

ʤaawab sʕaarax saafar naazaʕ laaʕab ðˤaarab

ʕəli laaʕab uxuuh mħammad naazaʕ rəbiʕah fi əlʤaamʕa ətˤtˤəlˤlˤaab ʤaawəbaw fi əlħəsˤsˤa əlrajjaal saafar ʔams ħamda kaasəraat əlbajjaaʕ

answered (to s.o.) shouted (at s.o.) traveled fought hard played (with s.o.) fought (s.o.)

Ali played with his brother. Mohammed fought with his friend at the university. The students answered in the class. The man traveled yesterday. Hamda bargained with the salesman.

Practice Glossary

‫الطالب‬ ‫المعلم‬ ‫دكتور‬ ‫اخت‬ ‫سباق‬ ‫موظف‬ ‫الفريق‬

ətˤtˤəlˤlˤaab əlmʕalləm dəktoor əʔxət səbaaq muwaðˤðˤaf əlfariiq

the students the teacher doctor sister race employee the team

‫الرحله‬ ‫سامع‬ ‫مريض‬ ‫مدير‬ ‫راكب‬ ‫ساعد‬ ‫اخبار‬

ərrəħla saamaʕ məriiðˤ mudiir raakab saaʕad ʔaxbaar

the trip heard patient manager got on helped news

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-10

39

10

Exercise 10.1

Form III Verbs

For the following roots, state the Form III verbs and guess their meaning. a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

‫عقب‬ ‫علج‬ ‫زحم‬ ‫وفق‬ ‫عند‬ ‫شرك‬ ‫ذكر‬

‫عقب‬ ‫علج‬ ‫زحم‬ ‫وفق‬ ‫عند‬ ‫شرك‬ ‫ذكر‬

ʕqb ʕlʤ zħm wfq ʕnd ʃrk ðkr

punished treated jostled agreed insisted (about s.o.) shared (in sth.) studied

Exercise 10.2 Translate the following Emirati Arabic sentences into English. a. b. c. d. e. f.

‫المعلم وافق على الرحله‬ ‫الدكتور عالج المريض‬ ‫حمده شاركت في السباق‬ ‫المدير ساعد الموظفين‬ ‫حمد زاحم البياعين‬ ‫راشد ذاكر دروسه‬

əlmʕalləm waafaq ʕala əlrəħla əldəktoor ʕaalaʤ əlmareiidˤ ħamda ʃaarəkat fi əssəbaaq əlmodiir saaʕad əlmowaðˤðˤafiin ħamad zaaħam əlbajjaaʕiin raaʃəd ðaakar druusah

Exercise 10.3 Translate the following English sentences into Emirati Arabic using Form III verbs.

40

a. Zayed traveled to the conference. b. The head of the school agreed on the trip. c. Noura watched the movie. d. Hessah helped her father. e. Ali played with the kids. f. Hasan met the manager.

UNIT 11 Form V Verbs

Form V verbs are derived from Form II verbs by adding the prefix -‫ ت‬t-. Thus, if we add the prefix to Form II verb ‫ غ يّر‬ɣajjar ‘changed something’, we end up with the Form V verb ‫ تغ يّر‬tɣajjar ‘(someone/something) changed’, with an intransitive meaning. As can be seen from the example, Form V verbs frequently reduce the number of participants in the event described by the verb. Thus, while Form II ‫ غ يّر‬ɣajjar describes an action of changing something, the Form V verb ‫ تغ يّر‬tɣajjar describes an action of someone (or something) changing themselves (or itself). In other cases, Form V verbs can express the passive meaning. Some more examples of Form V verbs are: Root

‫ل–م‬-‫ع‬ ‫ ر‬- ‫ط‬- ‫س‬ ‫ر‬-‫ط‬-‫ع‬ ‫ط‬-‫ش‬-‫م‬ ‫ر‬-‫ط‬-‫ب‬ ‫ع‬-‫و‬-‫ر‬

Form V ʕ-l-m s - tˤ - r ʕ - tˤ - r m - ʃ - tˤ b - tˤ - r r-w-ʕ

ْ ‫تعل م‬ ْ ‫تسط ر‬ ْ ‫تعط ر‬ ‫تم ْش ط‬ ْ ‫تبط ر‬ ‫تروّع‬

təʕallam təsatˤtˤar təʕatˤtˤar təmaʃʃatˤ təbatˤtˤar trawwaʕ

learned got beaten perfumed combed got arrogant got frightened

Examples ‫ أنا تسطرت من خالد‬ʔana təsatˤtˤart mən ‫البنات تعطرن فالجامعة‬ ‫محمد تلحف عشان يرقد‬ ‫أحمد تعور من ال َّدراجة‬ ‫االيميل اطرش للكل‬ ‫محمد تغدا بعد ما رجع‬ ‫من المدرسة‬ ‫حمد تعلم الرسم‬

xaaləd ʔelbanaat tʕatˤtˤəran fəldʒaamʕa mħammad tlaħħaf ʕaʃaan jərged ʔaħmad tʕawwar mən əddarraadʒah əlʔimeel əttˤarraʃ ləlkəll mħammad tɣadda baʕd maa rədʒaʕ mən əlmədərsa ħamad tʕallam ərrsam

I got beaten by Khaled. The girls sprayed perfume (on themselves) at the university. Mohammed got covered up to sleep. Ahmed got injured from the bike. The email was sent to everyone. Muhammad had lunch after he came back from school. Hamad learned drawing.

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-11

41

11

Practice

Form V Verbs

Glossary

‫ ت رتب‬trattab

was organized

‫ مكان‬məkaan

place

‫ تغسل‬təɣassal ‫ تذ ّك ر‬tðakkar ‫ تك ّش خ‬tkaʃʃax

got washed

‫ مفتاح‬məftaah ‫ حق‬ħagg ‫ شغل‬ʃəɣəl

key

remembered got dressed up

ّ ‫تو‬ ‫صخ‬ ‫تف نّ ش‬ ‫ت ّك لمت‬ ‫تلبست‬ ‫تف ّش ل‬

twasˤsˤax

got dirty

tfannaʃ

got fired

təkalləmat

she talked

tlabbəsat

dressed up

tfaʃʃal

got embarrassed

‫تروّع‬ ‫تحمس‬ ‫تسلّ م‬ ‫تغيرت‬ ‫تحدى‬ ‫تكهربت‬ ‫تطوع‬

tərawwaʕ

got scared

tħammas

excited

tsallam

received

tɣajjərat

changed (f)

tħaddi

challenge

tkahrəbat

electrocuted

tətˤawwaʕ

volunteered

improved ‫ تحسن‬tħassan ‫ الطلعه‬ʔətˤtˤalʕʕah going out

‫باأللوان‬ ‫الكلمة‬ ‫المفاتيح‬ ‫أمس‬

42

bəlʔalwaan with colors əlkəlmah

the word

əlməfaatiiħ the keys ʔams

yesterday

‫بنات‬ ‫اختي‬ ‫الجامعة‬ ‫الدوام‬ ‫في‬ ‫المحاضرة‬ ‫كلمة السر‬ ‫شنطتها‬ ‫اخوي‬ ‫ابوي‬ ‫امي‬ ‫اإلعاقة‬ ‫وزارة‬ ‫التعليم‬ ‫القطوة‬ ‫للمسابقة‬

For worked

banaat

girls

ʔəxti

my sister

əlʤaamʕah

the university

əddəwaam

workday

filmuħaadˤarah at the lecture kəlmat əssər

password

ʃantˤatha

her bag

ʔuxuuj

my brother

ʔubuuj

my dad

ʔummi

my mom

alʔiʕaaqah

disability

wəzaarat əttaʕliim

Ministry of Education

əlgatˤwah

the cat

ləlmusaabaqah for the competition

‫ المدرسة‬əlmadrəsah

the school

Practice

11

Exercise 11.1

Form V Verbs

Given the following sentences, choose the correct verb form.

‫ ابوي ــــــــــــــ مكان المفتاح‬ʔubuuj ‫ ـــــــــــــــــــــ‬məkaan My dad remembered

1.

ʔlməftaah

a. b. c.

‫ تذ ّك رت‬tðakkərat ‫ تذ ّك ر‬tðakkar ðakkar ‫ذ ّك ر‬

‫امي ــــــــــــــ حق الطلعه‬

2.

a. b. c.

ʔummi ‫ ــــــــــــــــــــــ‬ħag My mom got dressed up ətˤtˤalʕa for going out.

‫ تك ّش خت‬tkaʃʃəxat ‫ تك ّش ن‬tkaʃʃəxan ‫ تك ّش خ‬tkaʃʃax

‫ اخوي ـــــــــــــــ باأللوان‬ʔuxuuj ‫ ـــــــــــــــــ‬bəlʔalwaan

3.

a. b. c.

the key place.

ّ ‫و‬ ‫صخ‬ ّ ‫تو‬ ‫صخ‬ ّ ‫و‬ ‫ص خن‬

My brother got dirty with colors.

wasˤsˤax twasˤsˤax wasˤsˤaxn

‫ حمد ـــــــــــــــ من الشغل‬ħamad ‫ ـــــــــــــــــ‬mən ʔʃʃəɣəl Hamad got fired from

4.

his work.

a. b. c.

‫ تف نّ ش‬tfannaʃ ‫ ف نّ ش‬fannaʃ ‫ مف نّ ش‬mfannaʃ

Exercise 11.2 Translate the following Emirati Arabic sentences into English. a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

‫مها تغيرت بعد الجامعة‬ ‫أحمد تفنش من الدوام‬ ‫حصة تكلمت في المحاضرة‬ ‫عايشة تذكرت كلمة السر‬ ‫حمد تحدى اإلعاقة‬ ‫خالد تطوع مع وزارة التعليم‬ ‫راشد تسلم المفاتيح‬

maha tɣajjərat baʕd əlʤaamʕah ʔahmad tfannaʃ mən əddəwaam ħəsˤsˤah tkalləmat filmuħadˤarah ʕaajʃah tðakkərat kəlmat əlssər hamad tħadda əlʔiʕaaqah xaaləd tətˤawwaʕ maʕ wəzaarat əttaʕliim raaʃəd tsallam əlmafaatiiħ

43

11

Exercise 11.3

Form V Verbs

Translate the following English sentences into Emirati Arabic using Form V verbs.

44

a. My brother received the certificate. b. Hessah dressed up. c. Hamada remembered the word. d. Maryam got her bag dirty. e. The cat got electrocuted yesterday. f. Hasan is excited about the competition. g. Khalid improved in school.

UNIT 12 Form VI Verbs

If we attach the prefix -‫ ت‬t- to Form III verbs such as ‫ شاور‬ʃaawar ‘consulted someone’, we derive a Form VI verb ‫ تشاور‬tʃaawar, which has the meaning of ‘deliberated with each other’. In English grammar, the word ‘each other’ is called a reciprocal, a type of word that denotes that the action that the verb describes is bidirectional: A does it to B and B does it to A at the same time. Form VI verbs often (but not always) have such a reciprocal meaning. Sometimes, they just carry the meaning of the Form III verb they are derived from. Root

‫ر‬-‫و‬-‫ش‬ ‫س‬-‫ب‬-‫ل‬ ‫ب‬-‫ع‬-‫ل‬ ‫ش‬-‫و‬-‫ه‬ ‫ز‬-‫ز‬-‫د‬ ‫ي‬-‫ش‬-‫م‬ ‫ق‬-‫ب‬-‫س‬ ‫ك‬-‫ر‬-‫ش‬ ‫ك‬-‫س‬-‫م‬ ‫ب‬- ‫ ر‬- ‫ض‬

Form VI ʃ-w-r l-b-s l-ʕ-b h-w-ʃ d-z-z m -ʃ - j s -b - g ʃ-r-k m-s-k ðˤ - r - b

‫تشاور‬ ‫تالبس‬ ‫تالعب‬ ‫تهاوش‬ ‫تدازز‬ ‫تماشى‬ ‫تسابق‬ ‫تشارك‬ ‫تماسك‬ ‫تضارب‬

tʃaawar tlaabas tlaaʕab thaawaʃ tdaazaz tmaaʃaa tsaabag tʃaarak tmaasak tðˤaarab

deliberated with e.o. wore s.o.’s clothes manipulate with s.o. argued with s.o. (aggressively) pushed s.o. got along with s.o. raced with s.o. shared something with s.o. held onto e.o. fought with s.o.

The following are some sentence examples, which contain a Form VI verb.

‫سعيد تهاوش مع علي‬ ‫أنا وموزة تالبسنا نفس‬ ‫المالبس‬ ‫خالد تعارف ويا عيال‬ ‫عمه‬ ‫خلود تماسكت برفيجتها‬ ‫من الخوف‬ ‫علي تشارك الكيكة مع‬ ‫سالم‬ ‫تسابقنا انا وحمد لين‬ ‫البيت‬

sʕiid thaawaʃ maʕ ʕəli ʔana w mooza tlaabasna nafs əlmalaabes xaaled tʕaaraf wijja ʕjaal ʕammah xuluud tmaasəkat brəfiidʒatha mən əlxoof ʕəli tʃaarak əlkejkah maʕ saaləm tsaabagnaa ʔana w ħamad leen əlbeet

Saeed argued with Ali. Mouza and I wore the same clothes. Khaled got to know his cousins. Khuloud held onto her friend out of fear. Ali shared a cake with Salem. Hamad and I raced home.

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-12

45

‫ تبارت العين مع الوحدة‬tbaarat əlʕeen maʕ

12 Form VI Verbs

.‫الرياييل تضاربوا‬

əlweħdah ərrəjaajiil tðˤaarəbaw

Al Ain (team) competed with Al Weħda (team). The men fought with each other.

Practice Glossary

‫تعاند‬ ‫كرف‬ ‫نفس‬ ‫المالبس‬ ‫الخوف‬ ‫برفيجتها‬ ‫الرياييل‬ ‫ترفس‬ ‫تهازب‬ ‫تعالج‬ ‫ت راجع‬ ‫تعارف‬

tʕaanəd karf nafs əlmalaabəs əlxoof brəfiidʒatha ərrəjaajiil tərfəs thaazəb tʕaalədʒ traadʒəʕ tʕaarəf

insist (f) hard work same clothes fear with her friend the men kick scold treat revise got to know

‫فرش‬ ‫تكيه‬ ‫الكيكة‬ ‫تبارت‬ ‫ت راشو‬ ‫تخاوي‬ ‫ت رابع‬ ‫تغازل‬ ‫تسافر‬ ‫عيال‬ ‫الرفيجات‬

farʃ takjah əlkeekah tbaarat (f) traaʃʃaw txaawii traabəʕ tɣaazəl tsaafər ʕjaal ərrfiidʒaat

carpets pillow the cake competed sprayed go with running after flirt travel children friends

Exercise 12.1 For the following roots, provide the corresponding Form VI verbs and guess their meaning. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. 46

‫ ضرب ض ر ب‬ðˤarab ‫وفق‬ ‫ وافق‬wafg ‫سعد‬ ‫ سعد‬saʕd ‫زمط‬ ‫ زمط‬zamtˤ ‫ربع‬ ‫ ربع‬rabʕ ‫ شارك ش ر ك‬ʃark ‫زعل‬ ‫ زعل‬zaʕl ‫زعج‬ ‫ زعج‬zʕdʒ ‫غزل‬ ‫ غزل‬ɣuzl ‫وجع‬ ‫ وجع‬wadʒʕ ‫خلط‬ ‫ خلط‬xalatˤ ‫سفر‬ ‫ سفر‬safr

fought agreed helped challenged befriended shared upset talked loudly flirted scolded mixed traveled

Exercise 12.2

12

Translate the following Emirati Arabic sentences into English.

Form VI Verbs

a. b. c. d. e.

‫ت راشو الرفيجات بالماي‬ ‫تعورو العيال من الربعان‬ ‫تخاوي البنت ربيعتها‬ ‫تعاند البنت امها‬ ‫ترفس نعمه بيدينها‬

traaʃʃaw ərrfiidʒaat bəlmaaj tʕəwwəraw əlʕjaal mən ərrabʕaan txaawi əlbənt rəbiiʕatha tʕaanəd əlbənt ʔumha tərfəs əlnnəʕmah biideenha

Exercise 12.3 Translate the following English sentences into Emirati Arabic using Form VI verbs.

a. We fought with Shamsa. b. Mariam is helping Alyazia. c. The doctor is treating Hind. d. Mom is scolding Shamma. e. The boy was upset with his friend. f. She kept running after her child. g. My grandpa is flirting with my grandpa. h. She kept facing her kids. i. She always travels during summer. j. The doctor is revising for the exam.

47

UNIT 13 Form VII Verbs

Form VII is formed by adding the prefix - ‫ ﻧ‬n- to Form I. Thus, from Form I verb ‫ عرف‬ʕaraf ‘knew’, we can derive the Form VII verb ‫ انعرف‬nʕaraf ‘was known’. Form VII verbs usually express the passive meaning of the verb. Root

Form VII

‫س‬-‫ر‬-‫ت‬ ‫ز‬-‫ب‬-‫خ‬ ‫خ‬-‫ب‬-‫ط‬ ‫م‬-‫س‬-‫ر‬ ‫ب‬-‫ت‬-‫ك‬

t -r - s x-b-z tˤ - b - x r-s-m k - t -b

‫انترس‬ ‫انخبز‬ ‫انطبخ‬ ‫انرسم‬ ‫انكتب‬

ntəras nxəbaz ntˤəbax nrəsam nkətab

was filled was baked was cooked was drawn was written

Examples ‫ احمد انقرص من النحل‬ʔaħmad ngərasˤ mən ‫الكيكة انخبزت أمس‬

ənnaħl əlkeeka nxəbzat ʔams

‫ علي انسحب من المسابقة‬ʕəli nsəħab mən əlmusaabaqa

‫ انقتل علي امس‬ʔənqatal ʕəli ʔams ‫ انصدم من المشهد‬ʔənsˤədam mən əlmaʃhad

Ahmed was stung by the bees. The cake was baked yesterday. Ali was withdrawn from the competition. Ali got killed yesterday. He got shocked from the scene.

Practice Glossary

48

‫انقتل‬ ‫انقرص‬ ‫انخبزت‬ ‫انسحب‬

əngətal əngərasˤ ənxebzat ənsaħab

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-13

was killed was pinched was baked (fem.) was withdrawn

‫مشهد‬ ‫كيكة‬ ‫أكل‬ ‫تيس‬

maʃhad keeka ʔakəl tees

scene cake food goat

‫انقرص‬ ‫انصدم‬ ‫انسدح‬ ‫بطنه‬ ‫ولد‬ ‫قطوة‬ ‫الستاذ‬ ‫خبز‬ ‫وراق‬ ‫جتفها‬ ‫سيارة‬ ‫انخبصت‬

ngərasˤ nsˤadam nsadaħ batˤnah walad gatˤwa əstaað xəbz ʔawraag tʃatəfha səjjaara ənxebsˤat

was stung was shocked laid his stomach boy female cat teacher bread papers her shoulder car got mixed

‫حق‬ ‫جيس‬ ‫العيد‬ ‫فستان‬ ‫روب‬ ‫شغل‬ ‫باب‬ ‫دلة‬ ‫نحل‬ ‫التيس‬ ‫الدلة‬

ħag tʃiis əlʕiid fəstaan roob ʃəɣəl baab dallah naħl əttees əddallah

for bag Eid dress yogurt work door flask bees goat flask

13 Form VII Verbs

Exercise 13.1 For the following roots, state the Form VII verbs. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k.

‫كتب‬ ‫طبخ‬ ‫ذبح‬ ‫عجب‬ ‫خبص‬ ‫خطف‬ ‫هزب‬ ‫خلع‬ ‫صبب‬ ‫قسم‬ ‫قفل‬

k-t-b tˤ-b-x ð-b-ħ ʕ-ʤ-b x-b-sˤ x-tˤ-f h-z-b x-l-ʕ sˤ-b-b q-s-m g-f-l

‫كتب‬ ‫طبخ‬ ‫ذبح‬ ‫عجب‬ ‫خبص‬ ‫خطف‬ ‫هزب‬ ‫خلع‬ ‫صب‬ ‫قسم‬ ‫قفل‬

kətab tˤəbax ðəbaħ ʕeʤab xebasˤ xetˤaf hezab xelaʕ sˤabb qesam gəfal

wrote cooked killed liked mixed kidnapped scolded dislocated spilled split locked

Exercise 13.2 Translate the following Emirati Arabic sentences into English. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k.

‫احمد انقرص من النحل‬ ‫انسدح على بطنه‬ ‫انطبخ األكل‬ ‫انعجب الولد بالبنت‬ ‫انذبح التيس حق العيد‬ ‫القطوة انخطفت‬ ‫انهزب الستاذ‬ ‫انخبصت األوراق‬ ‫انخلع جتفها‬ ‫انقفل الباب‬ ‫انصبت الدلة‬

ʔaħmad ngərasˤ mən əlnaħl ənsədaħ ʕala batˤnah ntˤəbax əlʔakəl ənʕeʤab əlwalad b əlbənt ənðebaħ əltees ħag əlʕiid əlgatˤwa ənxətˤfat ənhəzab ləstað ənxebsˤat əlʔawrag ənxelaʕ tʃatəfha əngəfal əlbaab ənsˤabbat əddallah

49

13

Exercise 13.3

Form VII Verbs

Translate the following English sentences into Emirati Arabic.

50

a. The coffee was spilled on the carpet. b. She (got) dislocated her left shoulder. c. The food was split between them. d. The child was kidnapped. e. The room got locked. f. The juice was spilled. g. The papers got mixed. h. The girl got scolded by her mom.

UNIT 14 Form VIII Verbs

Form VIII verbs are formed by a less frequent morphological process where the affix -‫ﺘ‬- t is inserted after the first root consonant. Form VIII verbs can have a number of different interpretations, e.g., passive, reflexive, and reciprocal, depending on the type of verb. Root

Form VIII

‫ق‬-‫ر‬-‫ح‬ ‫ ب‬- ‫ س‬-‫ك‬ ‫ ف‬- ‫ ج‬-‫ر‬ ‫ب‬-‫ر‬-‫خ‬ ‫ش‬-‫ع‬-‫ر‬ ‫ش‬-‫ل‬-‫ب‬ ‫ل‬-‫س‬-‫غ‬ ‫ل‬-‫د‬-‫ع‬ ‫ي‬-‫و‬-‫س‬ ‫ف‬-‫ل‬-‫خ‬ ‫ر‬-‫ز‬-‫م‬ ‫ي‬-‫ر‬-‫ش‬ ‫ل‬-‫غ‬-‫ش‬ ‫ر‬-‫م‬-‫ع‬ ‫ف‬-‫ش‬-‫ك‬ ‫م‬-‫ل‬-‫س‬

ħ-r–g k-s-b r - dʒ- f x-r-b r-ʕ-ʃ b-l-ʃ ɣ-s–l ʕ-d-l s-w-j x-l-f m-z-r ʃ-r-j ʃ-ɣ-l ʕ-m-r k-ʃ-f s-l-m

‫احترق‬ ‫اكتسب‬ ‫ارتجف‬ ‫اخترب‬ ‫ارتعش‬ ‫ابتلش‬ ‫اغتسل‬ ‫اعتدل‬ ‫استوى‬ ‫اختلف‬ ‫امتزر‬ ‫اشترى‬ ‫اشتغل‬ ‫اعتمر‬ ‫اكتشف‬ ‫استلم‬

əħtərag əktəsab ərtəʒdaf əxtərab ərtəʕaʃ əbtəlaʃ əɣtəsal əʕtədal əstəwa əxtəlaf əmtəzar əʃtəra əʃtəɣal əʕtəmar əktəʃaf əstəlam

was burned gained was shaking got ruined shivered got involved got cleaned got fixed became had a different point of view got filled bought worked visited the Grand Mosque in Mecca discovered received

Examples ‫ هم ارتعشوا من البرد‬hum ərtaʕaʃaw mən They shivered from the cold. əlbard

‫ علي اكتسب المعرفة‬ʕəli əktəsab ‫الفنيان انترس قهوة‬ ‫ابتلش عمر بالشرطة‬

əlmaʕrifah əlfənjan əntəras gahwa əbtəlaʃ ʕumar bəlʃərtˤa

Ali gained knowledge. The cup got filled with coffee. Omar got involved with the police.

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-14

51

‫ احترق قميص مريم‬əħtərag gəmiisˤ

14 Form VIII Verbs

‫علي استوى اشطر عن عمر‬ ‫اشترى حمد سيارة يديدة‬

marjam ʕəli əstəwa ʔaʃtˤar ʕan ʕumar əʃtəraa ħamad ­sajjaarah jədiida

Mariam’s T-shirt was burned. Ali became smarter than Omar. Hamad bought a new car.

Practice Glossary

‫اشترى‬ ‫استوى‬ ‫احترق‬ ‫ارتعش‬ ‫افتكر‬ ‫سمع‬ ‫ارتبش‬ ‫استلم‬ ‫اخترب‬ ‫اعتمر‬ ‫يديدة‬ ‫اشطر‬ ‫بالشرطة‬ ‫المعرفة‬ ‫الفنيان‬ ‫سيارة‬

əʃtəra əstəwa əħtərag ərtaʕaʃ əftəkar səmaʕ ərtəbaʃ əstəlam əxtərab əʕtəmar

bought became was burned shivered remembered heard got excited received got ruined visited the Grand Mosque in Mecca jədiida new (f) ʔaʃtˤar more hardworking bəlʃərtˤa with the police əlmaʕrifah knowledge əlfənjaan cup sajjaarah car

‫بيت‬ ‫عيد‬ ‫ماي‬ ‫جو‬ ‫غدا‬ ‫اخبار‬ ‫مطر‬ ‫ناس‬ ‫المدرسة‬ ‫مغيم‬ ‫برد‬ ‫انه‬ ‫بسبت‬ ‫بعد‬ ‫من‬

beet ʕiid maaj dʒaw ɣəda ʔaxbaar mətˤar naas madrəsah mɣajjəm

house Eid water weather lunch news rain people school cloudy

bard ʔənna bsəbbat baʕad mən

cold that because of after from

Exercise 14.1 Translate the following English sentences into Emirati Arabic using Form VIII verbs.

52

a. The weather became cloudy. b. Omar got excited after hearing the news. c. The house got filled with water because of the rain. d. Hamadan bought lunch after school. e. Ali remembered that the T-shirt was burned.

Exercise 14.2

14

Translate the following Emirati Arabic sentences into English.

Form VIII Verbs

‫البيت امتزر ناس‬ ‫علي استلم القميص‬ c. ‫محمد اعتمر بعد العيد‬ d. ‫اخترب الب سارة بعد ما احترق بيتها‬ a. b.

əlbeet əmtəzar naas ʕəli əstəlam ʔlgəmiisˤ

e.

mħammad əʕtəmar baʕad əlʕiid əxtərab laab saara baʕad maa əħtərag beetha naasˤər ərtaʕaʃ mən əlbard

‫ناصر ارتعش من البرد‬

53

UNIT 15 Form IX Verbs

Form IX verbs are formed by doubling the last root consonant (with a few exceptions where doubling does not occur). Their meaning almost always denotes a process of developing a physical defect or changing into a color and thus they are frequently associated with adjectives. Thus, the adjective ‫ غامج‬ɣaamədʒ ‘dark’ corresponds to ّ ‫ اغم‬əɣmadʒdʒ ‘darkened’. In a similar fashion, the color term the Form IX verb ‫ج‬ adjective ‫ اخضر‬ʔaxðˤar ‘green’ can further derive the Form IX verb ‫ اخضر‬xðˤarr ‘turned green’. The use of Form IX verbs in Emirati Arabic is quite rare, and in almost all cases they are derived from adjectives. Root

‫ر‬-‫م‬-‫س‬ ‫ل‬-‫ت‬-‫خ‬ ‫ل‬-‫ت‬-‫ع‬ ‫ر‬-‫ف‬-‫ص‬ ‫ر‬-‫ظ‬-‫ن‬

Form IX s-m-r x-t-l ʕ-t-l sˤ - f - r n - ðˤ - r

‫اسم َر‬ ‫اختل‬ ‫اعتل‬ ‫اصفر‬ ‫انطر‬

ʔəsmarr ʔəxtall ʔəʕtall ʔəsˤfarr ʔəntˤarr

became tanner lost balance became bad became yellow got ripped

Examples ‫أحمر محمد يوم مدحوه‬ ‫بيسمرون اليهال من البحر‬ ‫متن حمد‬ ‫انطر فستان ميثة‬

54

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-15

ʔəħmarr mħammad joom mədħooh bajəsmarroon əljahhaal mən əlbaħar ʔəmtann ħamad ʔəntˤar fəstaan meeθa

Mohammad blushed (i.e., got red) when they ­complimented him. The kids will get tanned from the beach. Mohammed got fat. Maitha’s dress got ripped.

Practice

15

Glossary

Form IX Verbs

‫ابيض‬ ‫احمر‬ ‫اصغر‬ ‫عاش‬ ‫اعتل‬ ‫افتر‬ ‫خربت‬ ‫ابتل‬ ‫اطول‬

ʔəbjaðˤðˤ ʔaħmarr ʔasˤɣarr ʕaaʃ ʔəʕtall ʔəftarr xərrabt ʔəbtall ʔətˤwall

became white became red became smaller lived became bad dizzy ruined got wet got taller

‫المبنى‬ ‫قميص‬ ‫انتل‬ ‫غسلناه‬ ‫انير‬ ‫بعد ما‬ ‫الشيبة‬

əlmabna gəmiisˤ ʔəntal ɣassalnaah njarr baʕad ma əʃʃeebah

building T-shirt taken off we washed it (masc.) was pulled after old man

Exercise 15.1 Translate the following English sentences into Emirati Arabic (using Form IX verbs).

a. The boy became white. b. The cat was pulled. c. The old man was dizzy. d. You ruined the car. e. He blew up the building.

Exercise 15.2 Translate the following Emirati Arabic sentences into English (using Form IX verbs). a. b. c. d. e.

‫احمر ويه محمد‬ ‫اعتل راشد‬ ‫ابتل محمد بالماي‬ ‫انتل سعيد من مكانه‬ ‫اطول محمد يوم كل بيض‬

ʔəħmarr wajh mħammad ʔəʕtall raaʃəd ʔəbtall mħammad bəl maaj ʔəntall səʕiid men məkaanah ʔətˤwall mħammad jwum kəl bajdˤ

55

UNIT 16 Form X Verbs

The final verb form in Emirati Arabic is the extremely rare Form X, which is formed by adding the prefix - ‫ است‬sta- to the root. Historically, most of the Form X verbs were borrowed from MSA or other Arabic varieties (e.g., Egyptian Arabic). For some Form X verbs, the meaning can be reflexive (e.g., staqaal ‘resigned (himself)’). Sometimes they can also express a benefactive meaning (i.e., the subject became a beneficiary as a result of the action).  

Root

‫ر‬-‫ف‬-‫غ‬ ‫ ر‬-‫ غ‬- ‫ص‬ ‫ف‬-‫ر‬-‫ش‬ ‫ل‬-‫ق‬-‫ث‬ ‫ل‬-‫ب‬-‫ه‬ ‫د‬-‫ع‬-‫ب‬ ‫ل‬-‫م‬-‫ع‬ ‫ر‬-‫ش‬-‫ب‬ ‫ر‬-‫ص‬-‫ب‬ ‫ن‬-‫ع‬-‫ل‬ ‫ر‬-‫ب‬-‫ك‬ ‫ب‬-‫ع‬-‫و‬ ‫ر‬-‫ث‬-‫ك‬ ‫ ف‬- ‫ ز‬-‫ن‬ ‫ر‬-‫ب‬-‫خ‬ ‫ ر‬- ‫ ك‬-‫ن‬ ‫ب‬-‫ر‬-‫غ‬ ‫ط‬-‫ب‬-‫ع‬ ‫س‬-‫ب‬-‫ل‬

Form X ɣ-f-r sˤ - ɣ - r ʃ-r-f θ-g-l h-b-l b-ʕ-d ʕ-m-l b-ʃ-r b - sˤ - r l-ʕ-n k-b-r w-ʕ-b k-θ-r n-z-f x-b-r n-k-r ɣ-r-b ʕ - b - tˤ l-b-s

56

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-16

‫استغفر‬ ‫استصغر‬ ‫استشرف‬ ‫استثقل‬ ‫استهبل‬ ‫استبعد‬ ‫استعمل‬ ‫استبشر‬ ‫استبصر‬ ‫استلعن‬ ‫استكبر‬ ‫أستوعب‬ ‫استكثر‬ ‫استنزف‬ ‫استخبر‬ ‫استنكر‬ ‫استغرب‬ ‫استعبط‬ ‫استلبس‬

əstaɣfar əstasˤɣar əstaʃraf əstaθgal əstahbal əstabʕad əstaʕmal əstabʃar əstabsˤar əstalʕan əstakbar əstawʕab əstakθar əstanzaf əstaxbar əstankar əstaɣrab əstaʕbatˤ əstalbas

asked for forgiveness underestimated felt prideful felt heavy acted naively ruled out used cheered up/forebode well predicted/saw clearly acted cursedly acted arrogant realized found it a lot drained it invested in didn’t recognize it was surprised acted naively got possessed

Examples

16

‫ استغفرت مريم ربها‬əstaɣfərat marjam rabbha Maryam asked pardon ‫استصغر محمد اخوه‬ ‫الصغير‬ ‫استثقل الولد عمره جدام‬ ‫الريايل‬ ‫استعمل عبدالله تلفون‬ ‫أخوه‬ ‫أحمد تم يستهبل جدام‬ ‫ربعه‬

əstasˤɣar mħammad ʔəxuuh əsˁsˁəɣiir əstaθgal əlwalad ʕumrah dʒəddaam əlrəjaajiil əstaʕmal ʕabdallaah telefoon Ɂəxuuh ʔaħmad tamm jəstahbəl dʒəddaam rabʕah

Form X Verbs

from her God. Mohammad belittled his younger brother. The boy acted maturely in front of the men. Abdullah used his brother’s phone. Ahmed kept acting silly in front of his friends.

Practice Glossary

‫ استمرض‬əstamraðˤ pretended to be

‫ استفتح‬əstaftaħ opened the

‫استنجد‬ ‫استخبر‬ ‫استحل‬ ‫استذكر‬ ‫استمتع‬ ‫استلبس‬ ‫استهبلت‬ ‫استشرف‬

‫يهال‬ ‫محل‬ ‫رحلة‬ ‫حياة‬ ‫الشرطة‬ ‫بنية‬ ‫يديد‬ ‫جديم‬

‫استحلت‬ ‫استقعد‬

sick əstandʒad asked for help əstaxbar asked about s.th. əstaħall took s.o.’s place əstaðkar remembered s.th. əstamtaʕ enjoyed əstalbas possessed by devil əstahbəlat she showed the fool əstaʃraf acted in a prideful/ condescending way əstaħallat she took s.o.’s place əstagʕad stayed

jahhaal maħal rəħlah ħajaat əʃʃurtˁah bnajjah jədiid dʒədiim

thing first children shop trip life police girl new old

friend ‫ ربيع‬rəbiiʕ ‫ مكان‬məkaan place

Exercise 16.1 Translate the following English sentences into Emirati Arabic (using Form X verbs).

a. Mohammed opened his new shop. b. The father asked about his children. c. The girl enjoyed the trip. d. The grandfather remembered his old life. e. Moza took her friend’s place at work.

57

16

Exercise 16.2

Form X Verbs

Translate the following Emirati Arabic sentences into English (using Form X verbs) a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.

58

‫راشد استنجد بالشرطة‬ ‫البنت استهبلت على اخوها‬ ‫الريال استشرف علينا‬ ‫حرمة ابوي استحلت مكان امي‬ ‫الولد استلبس عندنا‬ ‫أخوي الصغير استقعد ألمي‬ ‫ربيعتي استفزت السواق‬ ‫أبوي استعيل اختي‬ ‫الجندي استسلم في الحرب‬ ‫علي استأنف الحكم‬

raaʃəd əstandʒad bəʃʃərtˤa əlbənt əstahbəlat ʕala ʔəxuuha əlrajjaal əstaʃraf ʕaleena ħərmat ʔəbuuj əstaħallat məkaan ʔummi əlwalad əstalbas ʕəndəna ʔəxuuj əsˤsˤəɣiir əstagʕad lʔummi rəbiiʕti əstəfazzat əssawwaag ʔubuuj əstaʕjal ʔəxti əlʤəndi əstaslam fi əlħarb ʕəli əstaʔnaf əlħəkm

UNIT 17 Intransitive, Transitive, and Ditransitive Verbs

Verbs can be distinguished by their transitivity, i.e., whether they are intransitive, transitive, or ditransitive. Intransitive verbs are verbs that do not take any object, e.g., ‘sleep’, ‘laugh’, ‘run’, etc. Transitive verbs obligatorily take a direct object, e.g., ‘eat a burger’, ‘break the glass’, whereas ditransitive verbs take a direct and an indirect object, e.g., ‘give Mary a book’, ‘teach Mariam English’, etc. The following tables contain a list of basic intransitive, transitive, and ditransitive verbs that Emirati Arabic speakers use in daily conversations. Please notice that Emirati Arabic verbs do not have an infinitival form (i.e., forms without any tense inflection) as English does (e.g., ‘go’, ‘eat’, etc.), and the so-called ‘basic verb form’ (i.e., Form I; See Unit 8) is orthographically represented by listing the consonant roots only, which also expresses the meaning of the third person singular past tense. For instance, the basic form of ‫ مات‬maat ‘died’ also means ‘he died’.

Intransitive Verbs ‫ضحك‬ ‫صاح‬ ‫مات‬ ‫وصل‬ ‫ابتسم‬ ‫اختفى‬ ‫خلص‬ ‫ركض‬

ðˁəħak sˁaaħ maat wəsˁal ʔəbtəsam ʔəxtəfa xallasˁ rəkaðˁ

laughed cried died arrived smiled disappeared finished ran

‫صفق‬ ‫طلع‬ ‫يا‬ ‫راح‬ ‫نام‬ ‫طار‬ ‫نقز‬ ‫مشى‬

sˁaffag tˤəlaʕ jaa raaħ naam tˤaar nəgaz məʃa

clapped left came went slept flied jumped walked

The intransitive verb may be followed by an adverbial expression, which adds information about the time and location of the event.

‫ المريض مات فالمستشفى‬ʔəlmariiðˁ maat ‫علي نام فالسرير اليديد‬ ‫مريم ضحكت عالنكتة‬

The patient died in the fəlməstaʃfa hospital. ʕəli naam fəssəriir əljədiid Ali slept on the new bed. marjam ðˁəħkat ʕannəkta Mariam laughed at the joke.

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-17

59

Transitive Verbs

17 Intransitive, Transitive, and Ditransitive Verbs

Transitive verbs usually precede the direct object. The direct object can be a separate noun phrase or a suffix pronoun, which is attached to the verb.

‫حب‬ ‫رفع‬ ‫قتل‬ ‫سوا‬ ‫عرض‬ ‫حرك‬ ‫كره‬ ‫أحمد كل تفاحة‬ ‫مريم سوت كيكة‬ ‫محمد كسر التلفون‬ ‫موزة كرهته‬ ‫عهود تباه‬ ‫علي سواه‬

ħabb rəfaʕ gətal sawwa ʕəraðˁ ħarrak kərah

loved raised killed made showed moved hated

‫خبر‬ ‫سأل‬ ‫لقى‬ ‫ياب‬ ‫شرب‬ ‫كسر‬ ‫شاف‬

xabbar səʔal ləga jaab ʃərab kassar ʃaaf

ʔaħmad kal təffaaħa marjam sawwat keeka mħammad kassar əttəlfoon mooza kərhatah ʕəhuud təbaah ʕəli sawwaah

told asked found brought drank broke saw/watched

Ahmed ate an apple. Mariam made a cake. Mohamed broke the phone. Moza hated him/it. Uhood wants it. Ali made it.

Ditransitive Verbs Ditransitive verbs take a direct and an indirect object, usually without the mediation of any preposition (cf. English ‘John gave Mary a book’).

‫عطى‬ ‫ط َرش‬ ‫سأل‬ ‫تمنى‬ ‫خذ‬ ‫راهن‬ ‫دوّر‬ ‫أ ّك ل‬ ‫سلّ ف‬ ‫طلب‬ ‫زقر‬

ʕətˤa tˤarraʃ səʔal tmanna xað raahan dawwar ʔakkal sallaf tˤəlab zəgar

gave sent asked wished took bet searched fed lent ordered called

‫ع لَ م‬ ‫سمح‬ ‫عق‬ ‫ضم‬ ‫س وّى‬ ‫ع يّن‬ ‫روّى‬/‫راوى‬ ‫درّس‬ ‫خ بّر‬ ‫ر ّج ع‬ ‫اشترى‬

ʕallam səmaħ ʕagg ðˤamm sawwa ʕajjan raawa/rawwa darras xabbar radʒdʒaʕ əʃtəra

taught allowed threw saved/hid Made appointed showed taught told returned bought

‫ المعلم سلّ م زايد الشهاده‬ləmʕalləm sallam zaajəd The teacher handed Zayed əʃʃahaada

the certificate.

faransi

French. (You) teach Hassan programming.

‫ عف را عطت هند هدية‬ʕafra ʕətˤat hənd hədəjja Afra gave Hind a gift. ‫ علي راوى سالم صورة‬ʕəli raawa saaləm sˁuura Ali showed Salem a picture. ‫ راشد درّس حامد ف رنسي‬raaʃəd darras ħaaməd Rashed taught Hamid 60

‫ علم حسن البرمجة‬ʕalləm həsan ʔəlbarmadʒa

Practice

17

Glossary

‫باع‬ ‫كتب‬ ‫عنده‬ ‫ق را‬ ‫فر‬ ‫نقز‬ ‫ابتسم‬ ‫تحب‬ ‫عطى‬ ‫اقترح‬ ‫وعد‬ ‫شل‬ ‫عطس‬ ‫مستند‬ ‫الشركة‬ ‫المعلم‬ ‫الجامعة‬

baaʕ kətab ʕəndah gara farr nəgaz əʔbtəsam tħəbb ʕətˤaa əqtəraħ waʕad ʃall ʕətˤas mustanad əʃʃarəkah ləmʕalləm əlddʒaamʕah

sold wrote have read threw jumped smiled love gave suggested promised carried sneezed document the company the teacher the university

‫مدح‬ ‫رقص‬ ‫وصل‬ ‫طلب‬ ‫قطع‬ ‫مشى‬ ‫سلف‬ ‫بلغ‬ ‫طعم‬ ‫رسم‬ ‫نظف‬ ‫ناقش‬ ‫جذب‬ ‫درس‬ ‫طرش‬ ‫سلم‬ ‫سأل‬

mədaħ rəgasˁ wəsˁal tˤəlab gətˤaʕ məʃa sallaf ballaɣ tˤaʕʕam rəsam naðˁðˁaf naaqaʃ tʃəðab darras tˤarraʃ sallam səʔal

praised danced arrived ordered cut walked lent notified make s.o. taste s.th. drew cleaned discussed lied taught sent hand over asked

Intransitive, Transitive, and Ditransitive Verbs

Exercise 17.1 Indicate whether the following verbs are intransitive (I), transitive (T), or ditransitive (D). a.

‫ نورة باعت فاطمة كتاب‬nuura baaʕat faatˤma Noura sold Fatima a book.

b. c. d. e.

‫خليفة كتب كتاب‬ ‫ريم عندها قطوة‬ ‫مها نقزت عاألرض‬ ‫سيف فر كورة على ثاني‬

f.

‫حصة ابتسمت لصديقتها‬

g. h.

‫عاشة تحب ولدها‬ ‫ميثا عطت حصة وردة‬

i.

‫الشيبة مشى فالليل‬

j.

kətab xəliifa kətab ktaab riim ʕəndha gatˤwa maha nəgzat ʕalʔarðˁ seef farr kuura ʕala θaani ħəsˁsˁa əbtəsmat lsˁadiiqatha ʕaaʃa tħəb waladha meeθa ʕətˤat ħəsˁsˁa warda əʃʃeeba məʃa fəlleel

‫ حمدة قرت كتاب يديد‬ħamda gərat kətaab jədiid

Khalifa wrote a book. Reem has a cat. Maha jumped on the floor. Saif threw a ball at Thani. Hessa smiled at her friend. Aysha loves her son. Maitha gave Hessa a flower. The old man walked at night. Hamda read a new book. 61

Exercise 17.2

17 Intransitive, Transitive, and Ditransitive Verbs

Translate the following Emirati Arabic ditransitive sentences into English. a. b. c. d. e.

‫عبدالله سلف محمد فلوس‬ ‫مريم بلغت راشد الخبر‬ ‫حسن طعم القطوة لحم‬ ‫ناصر درس سلطان المنهج‬ ‫سلمى تعلم حمد انجليزي‬

ʕabdallah sallaf mħammad fluus marjam ballaɣat raaʃəd əlxabar ħasan tˤaʕʕam əlgatˤwah laħəm naasˤər darras səltˤaan əlmanhadʒ salma tʕalləm ħamad əngəliizi

Exercise 17.3 Translate the following English ditransitive sentences into Emirati Arabic.

62

a. Ali made the kid taste the food. b. Hassan gave Ali the test. c. The company sent Ali medicine. d. The teacher asked the student a question. e. Mozah handed the university the document.

UNIT 18 Verbal Nouns

‫ مصدر‬masdar is a noun form derived from a verbal base, usually referring to the action or state denoted by the verb, e.g. ‫ ركض‬rəkadˤ ‘ran’ vs. rakədˤ ‘running’,

corresponding to so-called ‘action nominalizations’ in other languages. It is a subtype of ‘(de)verbal nouns’ or ‘nominalizations’. There are several cases of semantic extension, in which a masdar denotes the participants or the result of the event, e.g., ‫ كل‬kal ‘ate’ vs. ‫ أكل‬ʔakəl ‘food’. The following tables show that masdar can be derived from various verb forms. Some masdar forms are derived by prefixation, whereas others involve the use of particular vowels.

Form I Masdar

‫سجد‬ ‫سكن‬ ‫حمى‬ ‫عفى‬

sədʒad səkan ħəmaa ʕəfa

prostrate lived protected exempted

‫سجود‬ ‫سكن‬ ‫حماية‬ ‫إعفاء‬

sudʒuud sakan ħəmaaja ʔəʕfaaʔ

prostration hostel protection exemption

Form II Masdar

‫ س ّم ى‬samma named ‫ تسمية‬tasmijja naming ‫ درَّس‬darras taught ‫ تدريس‬tadriis teaching ‫ دوّر‬dawwar searched ‫ تدوير‬tadwiir cycling

Form III Masdar

‫ ضارب‬dˁaarab fight (v) ‫ مضاربة‬mudˁaaraba fight ‫ حاسب‬ħaasab held s.o. accountable ‫ محاسبة‬muħaasaba accounting game ‫ بارى‬baara played against ‫ مباراة‬mbaara DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-18

63

Form V

18 Verbal Nouns

Masdar

‫ خصص‬təxasˤsˤasˤ specialized (in) ‫ تخصيص‬taxsˤiisˤ allocation

Form VIII Masdar

‫ اكتشف‬ʔəktəʃaf discovered ‫ اكتشاف‬ʔəktəʃaaf discovery ‫ ابتكر‬ʔəbtəkar invented ‫ ابتكار‬ʔəbtəkaar innovation

Form X Masdar

‫ استغفل‬ʔəstaɣfal distracted ‫ استغفال‬ʔəstəɣfaal fooling someone ‫ استغرب‬ʔəstaɣrab surprised ‫ استغ راب‬ʔəstəɣraab wonder/astonishment Some examples are shown below: University teaching is ‫ تدريس الجامعة يختلف عن‬tadriis əldʒaamʕa ‫ المدرسة‬jəxtələf ʕan əlmadrəsah different from school. The girls felt frightened ‫ البنات خافوا من الض رابة‬əlbanaat xafaw mən

‫التخصصات في جامعتنا‬ ‫متنوعة‬ ‫إبتكار الباصات النظيفة فاز‬ ‫بالمركز األول‬ ‫استغفال الناس شي مب هين‬

64

ədˁdˁaraaba əttaxasˤsˤusˤaat fi dʒaamʕatna mətnawʔah ʔəbtəkaar əlbaasˤaat ənnəðˁiifah faaz bəlmarkaz əlɁawwal ʔəstəɣfaal ənnaas ʃaj mub hajjən

of the fight. The specialties in our university are diverse. The clean bus innovation won the first place. Fooling people isn’t a simple thing.

Practice

18

Glossary

Verbal Nouns

‫طلب‬ ‫ب ّدل‬ ‫حمى‬ ‫فطر‬ ‫سكن‬ ‫مشروع‬ ‫وقت‬ ‫اولويه‬ ‫الترويج‬ ‫الزم‬ ‫الماي‬ ‫مهم‬ ‫اإلسالم‬

tˀəlab baddəl ħama fətˤar səkan maʃruuʕ wagt ʕawlawəjja əʔttarwiidʒ laazəm əlmaaj muhəm əlʔislaam

requested (you) replace protected break the fast lived project time priority promoting must water important Islam

‫بيئه‬ ‫وضح‬ ‫وجه‬ ‫خ يّر‬ ‫جهز‬ ‫وعي‬ ‫األكل‬ ‫موجود‬ ‫هواية‬ ‫صحي‬ ‫السياحة‬ ‫الق راية‬

biiʔa wədˤaħ wajh xajjar dʒəhaz waʕi əlʔakəl mawdʒuud həwaaja sˤəħħi əssəjaaħa əlgraaja

environment became clear face to choose ready consciousness eating existent hobby healthy tourism reading

Exercise 18.1 For the following basic verb forms, please put in the masdar form and guess its meaning. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.

‫تريق‬ ‫درّب‬ ‫حلّ ى‬ ‫سأل‬ ‫لعب‬ ‫كلم‬ ‫سلم‬ ‫صلى‬ ‫نزف‬

trajjag darrab ħalla səɁal ləʕab kallam sallam sˤalla nəzaf

ate breakfast coached ate dessert asked played spoke greeted prayed bled

Exercise 18.2 1. For the verb ‫ سكن‬səkan ‘lived at’, what will be the meaning of the masdar noun ‫ سكن‬sakan?

‫ سكن‬səkan lived at ‫ سكن‬sakan a. school b. hostel c. cinema d. hospital

65

2. For the verb ‫ جهز‬dʒəhaz ‘ready’, what will be the meaning of the masdar noun ‫ تجهز‬tadʒhiiz?

18 Verbal Nouns

‫جهز‬

dʒəhaz ready

‫ تجهيز‬tadʒhiiz

a. preparation b. available c. requested d. provide 3. For the verb ‫ خيّر‬xajjar ‘choose’, what will be the meaning of the masdar noun ‫ اختيار‬əxtijaar?

‫ خير‬xeer something good ‫ اختيار‬əxtijaar a. claim b. greet c. selection d. awareness 4. For the verb ‫ بدل‬baddəl ‘replace’, what will be the meaning of the masdar noun ‫ تبديل‬tabdiil?

‫ بدل‬baddəl replaced

‫ تبديل‬tabdiil

a. exchange b. select c. avoid d. choose 5. For the verb ‫ فطر‬fətˤar ‘break the fast’, what will be the meaning of the masdar noun ‫ فطور‬ftˤuur?

‫ فطر‬fətˤar break the fast ‫ فطور‬ftˤuur a. break b. breakfast c. cut d. eat 6. For the verb ‫ وعى‬waʕa ‘consciousness’, what will be the meaning of the masdar noun ‫ ؛وعي‬waʕi?

‫ وعى‬waʕa consciousness ‫ وعي‬waʕi

66

a. preparation b. decision c. awareness d. thinking

18 Verbal Nouns

7. For the verb ‫ طلب‬tˀəlab ‘requested’, what will be the meaning of the masdar noun ‫ طلب‬tˤalab?

‫ طلب‬tˀəlab requested ‫طلب‬

tˤalab

a. give b. deserve c. decision d. request

Exercise 18.3 Translate the following Emirati Arabic sentences into English. a. b. c. d.

‫ تجهيز المشروع يباله وقت وايد‬tadʒhiiz əlmaʃruuʕ jibaalah wagt waajəd ‫ سكن البنات احلى عن مال الشباب‬sakan əlbanaat Ɂaħla ʕan maal əʃʃabaab ‫ حماية البيئة من أولويات مجتمعنا‬ħəmaajat əlbiiɁa mən Ɂawlawijjaat mudʒtamaʕna

‫ كان االستغ راب واضح على ويوه‬kaan əlʔəstəɣraab waðˁəħ ʕala wujuuh kəl ‫ كل الموجودين‬əlmawdʒudeen

Exercise 18.4 Translate the following English sentences in Emirati Arabic using verbal nouns.

a. Promoting tourism is important. b. Eating with your right hand is a must in Islam. c. Drinking water is healthy. d. Drawing is my hobby. e. Reading books is so much fun.

67

UNIT 19 Adjectives

Adjectives are a major word class that functions to express or modify a property ascribed to a noun, forming a noun phrase (Unit 26). The adjective always follows the noun it modifies (called the ‘head noun’). This class of adjectives is called ‘attributive adjectives’ as it designates the attributes of the noun (cf. English ‘the tall boy’). On the other hand, adjectives can also function as a predicate, which describes the sentence subject (see Predicative Adjectives) (cf. ‘The boy is tall’). In both cases, the adjective agrees with the head noun/subject in number and gender. Attributive adjectives also agree with the head noun in definiteness (Unit 6). Masculine

‫عريض‬ ‫كبير‬ ‫جاسي‬ ‫متين‬ ‫ضعيف‬ ‫ناعم‬ ‫ملون‬ ‫معفوص‬ ‫منقص‬ ‫مقصوص‬ ‫بعيد‬ ‫جريب‬

Feminine ʕəriiðˤ kəbiir ʤaasi mətiin ðˤəʕiif naaʕəm mlawwan maʕfuusˤ məngasˤsˤ magsˤsˤuusˤ bəʕiid ʤəriib

‫عريضة‬ ‫كبيرة‬ ‫جاسية‬ ‫متينة‬ ‫ضعيفة‬ ‫ناعمة‬ ‫ملونة‬ ‫معفوصة‬ ‫منقصة‬ ‫مقصوصة‬ ‫بعيدة‬ ‫جريبة‬

Masculine

‫وردة صفرة‬ 68

‫قالص شفاف‬

broad big hard (texture) fat thin/weak soft colored shrunk cut cut far near

Feminine

‫ أكل حار‬ʔakəl ‫مكان فاضي‬

ʕəriiˤðˤa kəbiira ʤaasja mətiina ðˤəʕiifa naaʕma mlawwəna maʕfuusˤa məngasˤsˤa magsˤuusˤa bəʕiida ʤəriiba

ħaar məkaan faaðˤi warda sˤafra glaasˤ ʃaffaaf

spicy food available seat yellow flower transparent glass

‫ سيارة صغيرة‬sajjara ‫ساعة غالية‬ ‫نكتة حلوة‬ ‫بالد آمنة‬

sˤəɣiira saaʕa ɣaalja nəkta ħəlwa blaad ʔaamna

small car expensive watch good joke safe country (Continued)

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-19

Masculine

‫ دفتر مخطط‬daftar ‫شارع ضيق‬ ‫تاير أسود‬ ‫قلم جاف‬

19

Feminine stripped mxatˤtˤatˤ notebook ʃaarəʕ narrow ðˤajjəg street taajər black tire ʔaswad galam dry pen ʤaaf

‫ مواد أساسية‬mawaad ‫علبة مستطيلة‬ ‫ورقة بيضا‬ ‫ثالجة خربانة‬

major ʔasaasəjja subjects ʕəlba rectangular mustatˤiila box wərga white paper beeðˤa θallaaʤa broken xarbaana refrigerator

Adjectives

Predicative Adjectives Alternatively, adjectives can function predicatively in the sense that they describe the subject of the sentence. In English, predicative adjectives usually follow the auxiliary verb, e.g., ‘John is smart’, ‘the question is difficult’, etc. Emirati Arabic predicative adjectives function in a similar way. They can also follow other verbs such as ‫ يبين‬jbajjən ‘it/he appears’, ‫ تبين‬tbajjən ‘it/she appears’, or ‫شكلها‬/‫شكله‬ ʃaklah/ʃaklha ‘it/he/she looks’:

‫الكتاب غالي‬ ‫السيارة سريعة‬ ‫البناية تبين عودة‬ ‫شكلها مريم زعالنة‬ ‫شكله أحمد خايف من الكلب‬

əlktaab ɣaali əssajjara sariiʕa əlbənaaja tbajjən ʕooda ʃakəlha marjam zaʕlaana ʔaħmad ʃaklah xaajəf mən əlkalb

The book is expensive. The car is fast. The building looks huge. Mariam seems unhappy. Ahmed seems afraid of the dog.

Comparatives and Superlatives The expression of Emirati Arabic comparatives (cf. English ‘taller’, ‘more intelligent’, etc.) and superlatives (e.g., English ‘the tallest’, ‘the most intelligent’, etc.) depends mainly on the syllabic structure of the basic adjectival form (see the descriptions about the syllabic structure of the verb forms in Units 8–16). In most cases, the comparative and superlative form is built on the pattern ʔaCCaC. There is no morphological distinction between comparatives and superlatives in Emirati Arabic, and the superlative meaning is inferred from the context. The following is a list of comparative forms based on the basic adjective. CCiiC

‫واضح‬ ‫نظيف‬ ‫هادي‬ ‫بطيء‬ ‫سريع‬ ‫فظيع‬

ʔCCaC waadˤəħ nəðˤiif haadi batˤiiʔ sariiʕ faðˤiiʕ

clear clean quiet slow fast horrible

‫أوضح‬ ‫أنظف‬ ‫أهدى‬ ‫أبطئ‬ ‫أسرع‬ ‫أفظع‬

ʔawdˤaħ ʔandˤaf ʔahda ʔabtˤaʔ ʔasraʕ ʔafðˤaʕ

clearer Cleaner quieter slower faster more horrible (Continued)

69

19 Adjectives

CCiiC

ʔCCaC

‫ وصخ‬wasˤx

dirty

CCuu

‫ أوصخ‬ʔawsˤax dirtier ʔCCa

‫ حلو‬ħəluu

pretty

CeeC

‫ احلى‬ʔaħla

prettier

ʔCejC

‫خفيف‬ ‫شين‬ ‫مريح‬ ‫غريب‬

xəfiif ʃeen muriiħ ɣariib

light bad comfortable strange

waC(ə)C

‫أخف‬ ‫أشين‬ ‫أريح‬ ‫أغرب‬

ʔaxaf ʔaʃjan ʔarjaħ ʔaɣrab

lighter worse more comfortable stranger

ʔawCC

‫جميل‬ ‫وسيع‬/‫واسع‬

ʤamiil beautiful wəsiiʕ/waasəʕ wide

CaCii/uu

‫ أجمل‬ʔaʤmal more beautiful ‫ أوسع‬ʔawsaʕ wider ʔCCa

‫راقي‬ ‫غالي‬ ‫رخيص‬ ‫سهل‬ ‫صعب‬ ‫م رتب‬

raaqi ɣaali rəxiisˤ sahl sˤaʕb mrattab

fancy expensive cheap easy hard tidy

‫أرقى‬ ‫أغلى‬ ‫أرخص‬ ‫أسهل‬ ‫أصعب‬ ‫أرتب‬

ʔarqa ʔaɣla ʔarxasˤ ʔashal ʔasˤʕab ʔartab

fancier more expensive cheaper easier harder tidier

The use of comparatives is always accompanied by the preposition ‫ عن‬ʕan ‘from/than’ (see Unit 21), which is not required for the expression of superlatives:

‫ أحمد أذكى عن أخوه‬ʔaħmad ʔaðka ʕan ‫شيخة أطول طالبة هنيه‬ ‫مريم أحلى بنت شفتها‬

ʔəxuuh. ʃeexa ʔatˤwal tˤaalbah hnii. marjam ʔaħla bənt ʃəftha.

Ahmad is smarter than his brother. Shaikha is the tallest student here. Mariam is the prettiest girl I have ever seen.

Practice Glossary

70

‫قصير‬ ‫صغير‬ ‫أصفر‬ ‫أخضر‬ ‫رصاصي‬ ‫عود‬ ‫م رتّ ب‬ ‫طويل‬

gəsˤiir sˤəɣiir ʔasˤfar ʔaxðˤar rəsˤaasˤi ʕood mrattab tˤəwiil

short small yellow green gray big organized long

‫رخيص‬ ‫غالي‬ ‫ب رتقالي‬ ‫مخترب‬ ‫أحمر‬ ‫أزرق‬ ‫بني‬ ‫ثجيل‬

rəxiisˤ ɣaali bərtəqaali məxtərəb ʔaħmar ʔazrag bənni θəʤiil

cheap expensive orange ruined red blue brown heavy

‫زعالن‬ ‫مكسور‬ ‫سما‬ ‫صادق‬ ‫م رتاح‬ ‫مستانس‬ ‫أختي‬ ‫بنت‬ ‫دفتر‬ ‫غرفة‬ ‫ساكت‬ ‫حر‬ ‫خطير‬ ‫لذيذ‬ ‫حلو‬ ‫ناقص‬ ‫أناني‬ ‫أكيد‬ ‫ضابط‬ ‫مطلوب‬ ‫عادي‬ ‫عتيج‬

zaʕlaan maksuur səma sˤaadəg mərtaaħ məstaanəs əxti bənt daftar ɣərfa saakət ħər xatˤiir laðiið ħəlu naagəsˤ ʔanaani ʔakiid ðˤaabətˤ matˤluub ʕaadi ʕətiiʤ

‫ أخير‬ʔaxiir ‫ بردان‬bardaan ‫بالستيكي‬ ‫حامض‬ ‫مر‬ ‫مك ّس ر‬ ‫مع فّ ص‬ ‫قوي‬ ‫أعوي‬ ‫غني‬ ‫فقير‬ ‫غير‬ ‫غلطان‬ ‫مهم‬ ‫شمالي‬ ‫شرقي‬ ‫غربي‬ ‫جنوبي‬ ‫ناشف‬ ‫علمي‬ ‫قادر‬

blaastiiki ħaaməðˤ mur mkassar mʕaffasˤ gəwi ʔaʕwaj ɣani faqiir ɣeer ɣaltˤaan muhəm ʃəmaali ʃargi ɣarbi ʤanuubi naaʃəf ʕəlmi gaadər

sad broken sky honest comfortable happy my sister girl notebook room silent free dangerous delicious beautiful/ good incomplete selfish certain suitable required ordinary ancient

‫خ وّاف‬ ّ ‫م‬ ‫ق‬ َ ‫ض اي‬ ‫كيسة‬ ‫معفن‬ ‫يديد‬ ‫معواي‬ ‫اكسسوار‬ ‫فستان‬ ‫كبت‬ ‫ممل‬ ‫معقول‬ ‫شايب‬ ‫مطبوخ‬ ‫طايح‬ ‫طبيعي‬ ‫ثابت‬ ‫خبير‬ ‫مختلف‬ ‫مخلّ ص‬ ‫عالي‬ ‫مصبوغ‬ ‫ح رام‬

xawwaaf məðˤðˤaajəg ʧiisa mʕaffən jədiid məʕwaaj əksəswaar fəstaan kabat muməl maʕguul ʃaajəb matˤbuux tˤaajəħ tˤabiiʕi

fearful upset bag rotten new crooked accessory dress cupboard boring reasonable old (age) cooked fallen natural

θaabət xabiir məxtələf mxalləsˤ ʕaali masˤbuuɣ ħaraam

constant expert different finished high dyed prohibited (by Islam) closed commendable responsible blessed furnitured lucky crazy forbidden broken lazy high complete stuffed tired known salty sweet (taste) sweet (taste) dear dried out stiff

last cold (feeling)

‫ مب نّ د‬mbannad ‫ مشكور‬maʃkuur

plastic sour bitter broken crumpled strong crooked rich poor different mistaken important northern eastern western southern dry scientific capable

‫مسؤول‬ ‫مبروك‬ ‫مفروش‬ ‫محظوظ‬ ‫مينون‬ ‫ممنوع‬ ‫مكسور‬ ‫كسالن‬ ‫عالي‬ ‫كامل‬ ‫محشي‬ ‫تعبان‬ ‫معروف‬ ‫مالح‬ ‫مس ّك ر‬ ‫حالي‬ ‫عزيز‬ ‫يابس‬ ‫متيبس‬

masʔuul mabruuk mafruuʃ maħðˤuuðˤ majnuun mamnuuʕ maksuur kaslaan ʕaali kaaməl maħʃi taʕbaan maʕruuf maaləħ msakkar ħaali ʕəziiz jaabəs mətjabbəs

19 Adjectives

71

‫جديم‬ ‫زين‬ ‫أول‬ ‫م تّ اخر‬ ‫ممكن‬ ‫وردي‬ ‫غايب‬

19 Adjectives

‫صح‬ ‫مفتوح‬ ‫صعب‬ ‫يوعان‬ ‫عطشان‬ ‫طالب‬ ‫كتاب‬ ‫أبرد‬/‫بارد‬ ‫أدفش‬/‫دفش‬

ʤədiim zeen ʔawwal məttaxxər mumkən wardi ɣaajəb

old good first late possible pink absent

sˤaħ maftuuħ sˤaʕb joʕaan ʕatˤʃaan tˤaaləb ktaab baarəd/ ʔabrad dəfʃ/ʔadfaʃ

right open difficult hungry thirsty student book cold/colder

‫يديد‬ ‫خايس‬ ‫آخر‬ ‫نازل‬ ‫عام‬ ‫كريم‬ ‫مس ّك ر‬ ‫فرحان‬ ‫غلط‬ ‫جذاب‬ ‫معصب‬ ّ ‫ملن‬ ‫موهوب‬ ‫الخبار‬ ‫ولد‬ ‫أضيق‬/‫ضيق‬

rough/ rougher

‫أدفى‬/‫ دافي‬daafi/ʔadfa warm/warmer hateful/more ‫أكره‬/‫ كريه‬kariih/ ʔakrah

‫أحر‬/‫ حار‬ħaar/ʔaħar

hateful hot/hotter

‫أفيد‬/‫مفيد‬ ‫أقل‬/‫قليل‬ ‫أعقل‬/‫عاقل‬

jədiid xaajəs ʔaaxər naazəl ʕaam kariim msakkar farħaan ɣalatˤ ʧaððaab mʕasˤsˤəb mallaan mawhuub laxbaar walad ðˤajjəg/ ʔaðˤjag mufiid/ ʔafjad

new bad last low general generous closed happy wrong liar angry bored talented the news boy tight/tighter

beneficial/ more beneficial gəliil/ʔagal a little/less ʕaagəl/ʔaʕgal wise/wiser

‫أغبى‬/‫ غبي‬ɣabi/ʔaɣba

fool/fooler

Exercise 19.1 Match the following English noun phrases with the correct translation. a. The cheap notebook b. The gray cupboard c. The red dress d. The tall girl e. The heavy bag   f. The blue sky g. An organized room  

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

‫البنت الطويلة‬ ‫الجيسة الثجيلة‬ ‫الدفتر الرخيص‬ ‫غرفة م رتبة‬ ‫الكبت الرصاصي‬ ‫السما الزرقا‬ ‫الفستان االحمر‬

əlbənt ətˤəwiila əlʧiisa əθəʤiila əddaftar ərrəxiisˤ ɣərfa mrattəba əlkabat ərrəsˤaasˤi əssəma əzzarga əlfəstaan laħmar

Exercise 19.2 Fill in the blanks.

72

a. b. c. d. e.

_______ ‫أختي‬ _______ ‫صالح‬ ___ ‫هاالكسسوار‬ ______ ‫هالفون‬ _______ ‫سارة‬

əxti _________ sˤaaləħ ________ haləksəswaar ___ hal foon _______ saara _________

My sister is sad. Saleh is fearful. This accessory is silver. This phone is old. Sarah is annoyed.

Exercise 19.3

19

Based on the following adjectives, put in the comparative form. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.

‫دفش‬ ‫دافي‬ ‫بارد‬ ‫حار‬ ‫ضيق‬ ‫مفيد‬ ‫قليل‬ ‫راقي‬ ‫غبي‬ ‫عاقل‬

dəfʃ daafi baarəd ħaar ðˤajjəg mufiid gəliil raaqi ɣabi ʕaagəl

Adjectives

rough warm cold hot narrow beneficial a little fancy fool wise

Exercise 19.4 Translate the following Emirati Arabic expressions into English. a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

‫السيارة الجديمة‬ ‫الفستان الوردي‬ ‫الطالب الغايب‬ ‫الكتاب يديد‬ ‫االخبار مملة‬ ‫شكله الولد كريم‬ ‫شكلها الغرفة مس ّك رة‬

əssajjaara əlʤədiima əlfəstaan əlwardi ətˤtˤaaləb əlɣaajəb əlktaab jədiid laxbaar muməlla ʃaklah əlwalad kəriim ʃakəlha lɣərfa msakkəra

Exercise 19.5 Translate the following English expressions into Emirati Arabic.

a. the oldest phone b. the most delicious dish c. the most required book d. the strongest building e. the fanciest room f. the worst result g. the funniest person

73

UNIT 20 Adverbs

Adverbs usually modify verbs (e.g., ‘run quickly’), adjectives (e.g., ‘extremely small’), and sometimes adverbs (e.g., ‘rather importantly’). They can also modify the entire sentence and the speaker’s attitude thereof (e.g., ‘Honestly, I don’t think so’). Different from English in which the word formation of adverbs can be morphologically productive (e.g., by adding the suffix -ly), Emirati Arabic adverbs may consist of independent words (e.g., ‫ أمس‬ʔams ‘yesterday’) or phrasal expressions such as ‫ بسرعة‬bsərʕa ‘quickly’ (lit. ‘with speed’) and ‫ كل يوم‬kəl joom ‘daily’ (lit. ‘every day’). Adverbs can be distinguished in terms of whether they express the meaning of time, place, manner, degree, frequency, possibility, and speaker’s attitude.

Adverbs of Time ‫الحين‬ ‫بعدين‬ ‫الليلة‬ ‫بعدين‬

əlħiin baʕdeen əlleela baʕdeen

now then tonight later

‫اليوم‬ ‫باكر‬ ‫أمس‬ ‫من قريب‬

əljoom baaʧər ʔams mən ʤəriib

today tomorrow yesterday recently

Examples

‫ بسير دبي اليوم‬basiir dbaj əljoom ‫ بتالقي ربيعتها بعدين‬batlaagi rəbiiʕatha ‫بسافر روما الليلة‬ ‫ش را فون يديد أمس‬ ‫بتسوي حفلة تخرج باجر‬

I will go to Dubai today. She will meet her friend baʕdeen later. basaafər rooma əlleela I will travel to Rome tonight. ʃara foon jədiid ʔams He bought a new phone yesterday. batsawwi ħaflat She will have her taxxarruʤ baaʧər graduation party tomorrow.

74

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-20

Adverbs of Place

20 Adverbs

‫ مني‬/‫هني‬ ‫ م نّ اك‬/‫هناك‬ ‫ ب رّع‬/‫ب رّا‬ ‫جريب‬ ‫كل مكان‬ ‫داخل‬ ‫بعيد‬ ‫جدام‬ ‫فوق‬

hnii/ mənnii hnaak/ mənnaak barra/ barraʕ ʤərib mən kəl məkaan daaxəl bəʕiid ʤəddaam foog

here there outside nearby everywhere inside far in the front upstairs

‫متواطي‬ ‫شرقي‬ ‫غربي‬ ‫شمالي‬ ‫جنوبي‬ ‫مجابل‬ ‫جريب‬ ‫ورا‬ ‫تحت‬

mətwaatˤi ʃargi ɣarbi ʃəmaali jənuubi mʤaabəl ʤəriib wara taħat

down eastbound westbound northward southward in front of near backwards downstairs

Examples

‫بحط الشنطة هني‬ ‫أنا واقفة ورا‬ ‫اقعد ب رّا‬ ‫بنا بيت جريب‬ ‫سير شرقي الدكان‬

baħətˤ əʃʃantˤa hnii ʔana waagfa wara əgʕəd barra bana beet ʤəriib siir ʃargi əddəkkan

I will put the bag here. I’m standing behind. Sit outside. He built a house nearby. Go east of the grocery store.

Adverbs of Manner ‫عدل‬ ‫بسرعة‬ ‫شوي شوي‬ /‫بشويش‬ ‫بوناسة‬ ‫بضيقة‬ ‫بعصبية‬ ‫بجمال‬ ‫بصوت عالي‬ ‫بحب‬ ‫ بشويش‬/‫بنعومة‬ ‫غص بًا عن‬ ‫ببرود‬ ‫ضروري‬ ‫بكره‬ ‫تالي‬ ‫أول‬ ‫بعناد‬

ʕadəl bsərʕa ʃwaj ʃwaj/ bəʃweeʃ bwanaasa bðˤiiga bʕasˤabijja

well quickly slowly

‫ بت رتيب‬btartiib ‫ بأدب‬bʔadab ‫ بأسلوب‬bəsluub

happily sadly angrily

‫ باحت رام‬bəħtəraam respectfully ‫ بسخافة‬bsaxaafa silly softly ‫ برقة‬əbrəqqa

bʤamaal bsˤoot ʕaali bħub bnuʕuuma/ bəʃweeʃ ɣasˤbən ʕan bəbəruud ðˤaruurii əbkərh taali ʔawwal bəʕnaad

beautifully loudly lovingly softly unwillingly coldly(attitude) necessarily hatefully next/after that first stubbornly

‫بطيبة‬ ‫بص راحة‬ ‫عدل‬ ‫عسى‬ ‫طول‬ ‫سيدة‬ ‫بخوف‬ ‫بأمان‬ ‫بأنانية‬ ‫بقو‬ ‫زين‬

organizedly politely mannerly

əbtˤiiba bsˤaraaħa ʕadəl ʕasa

(attitude) kindly frankly properly hopefully

tˤuul siida bxoof bamaan bʔanaanijja bgu zeen

along directly scaredly safely selfishly strongly well/good 75

Examples

20 Adverbs

‫يكتب عدل‬ ‫الكلب ركض بسرعة ورا‬ ‫الكورة‬ ‫وقفت شوي شوي‬ ‫كلو االكل غصب عنهم‬ ‫شافت فوق بضيقة‬ ‫سأل بعصبية‬ ‫مرسومة بطريقة حلوة‬ ‫الكيكة مصنوعة بحب‬

jəktəb ʕadəl əlkalb rəkaðˤ bsərʕa wara əlkuura wəgfat ʃwaj ʃwaj kalaw əlakəl ɣasˤbən ʕanhum ʧaafat foog bðˤiiga saʔal bʕasˤabijja marsuuma btˤariiqa ħəlwa əlkeeka masˤnuuʕa bħub

‫ قالت شو بصوت عالي‬gaalat ʃuu bsˤoot ʕaali ‫ همست بنعومة‬həmsat bnuʕuuma

He writes well. The dog quickly ran after the ball. She stood up slowly. They unwillingly ate the food. She looked up sadly. He asked angrily. beautifully drawn The cake was made with love. ‘What?’ she said loudly. She whispered softly.

Adverbs of Degree ‫ أكيد‬ʔakiid ‫ تقري بًا‬taqriiban ‫وايد‬ ‫بما فيه‬ ‫الكفاية‬

absolutely almost/ approximately waajəd quite bəmaa fiih enough əlkəfaaja

‫ وايد‬waajəd ‫ نهائ يًا‬/‫ أب دًا‬ʔabadan/

nəhaaʔijjan

very utterly

slightly ‫ شوي‬ʃwaj ّ ‫يال‬ ّ jaalla jaalla barely ‫يال‬

Examples

‫ خلصت البحث تقري بًا‬xallast əlbaħθ taqriiban I almost finished the research ‫ السؤال كان وايد صعب‬əssuʔaal kaan waajəd sˤaʕb

paper. The question was quite hard.

I was slightly annoyed. ‫ تضايقت شوي‬əðˤðˤaajagt ʃwaj ‫ أكيد حبيت الكيكة‬ʔakiid ħabbeet əlkeeka I absolutely liked the cake. You utterly should not scream. ‫ الزم ما تصارخ نهائ يًا‬laazəm maa tsˤaarəx nəhaaʔijjan

Adverbs of Frequency ‫كل سنة‬ ‫كل يوم‬ ‫كل يوم‬ ‫كل أسبوعين‬ 76

‫كل ساعة‬

kəl səna kəl joom kəl joom kəl əsbuuʕeen kəl saaʕa

annually daily every day fortnightly hourly

‫كل ليلة‬ ‫كل ربع سنة‬ ‫كل أسبوع‬ ‫كل سنة‬

kəl leela kəl rəbəʕ səna kəl əsbuuʕ kəl səna

‫ داي ًم ا‬daajman

nightly quarterly weekly yearly always

‫كل شهر‬ ‫داي ًم ا‬ ‫بشكل عام‬ /ً‫عام ة‬ ‫فالعادة‬

kəl ʃahar daajman bʃakl ʕaam/ ʕaammatan fəl ʕaada

monthly frequently generally normally

‫ فالعادة‬fəl ʕaada ‫ كل فترة‬kəl fatra ‫ م رّات‬marraat

constantly ‫ داي ًم ا‬daajman ‫ مب داي ًم ا‬mub daajman infrequently never ‫ أب دًا‬ʔabadan

‫ بين فترة‬been fatra ‫ أحيانً ا‬/‫ وفترة‬w fatra/

ʔaħjaanan

‫ نادرًا‬naadəran ‫ نادرًا‬naadəran ً‫ عادة‬ʕaadatan

often regularly sometimes

20 Adverbs

occasionally rarely seldom usually

Examples

ّ ‫ أنا ما‬ʔana maa ʧaððəb ʔabadan I never lie to my friends. ‫تشذب أب دًا على‬ ‫ ربعي‬ʕala rabʕi I rarely go to malls. ‫ نادرًا ما أسير الموالت‬naadəran maa ʔasiir əlmoolat

‫ سارة كل فترة تس وّي‬saara kəl fatra tsawwi ‫ تمارين‬tamaariin ‫ أحمد يشرب ماي كل ساعة‬ʔaħmad jəʃrab maaj kəl ‫م رّات تكتب بايدها اليمين‬ ً‫يوسف يلعب كورة عادة‬ ‫كل سنة يسافر‬

saaʕa marraat təktəb biidha ljəmiin juusəf jəlʕab kuura ʕaadatan kəl səna jsaafər

Sarah exercises regularly. Ahmad drinks water hourly. She writes with her left hand sometimes. Yousef usually plays football. He travels annually.

Adverbs of Possibility ‫ أكيد‬ʔakiid ‫ ممكن‬/‫ يمكن‬jəmkən/ ‫ احتمال‬/‫في احتمال‬

definitely/ certainly maybe

mumkən fii əħtəmaal probably/ possibly

‫ واضح‬waaðˤəħ obviously ‫ ممكن‬/‫ يمكن‬jəmkən/ perhaps mumkən

Examples

‫ في احتمال اني ايي‬fii əħtəmaal ənni ʔajji ‫ يمكن ما بيقدر يحضر‬jəmkən maa bajəgdar ‫واضح انها كانت غلطانة‬ ‫أكيد بسير وياج‬

jəħðˤar waaðˤəħ ənha kaanat ɣaltˤaana ʔakiid basiir wəjjaaʧ

I will probably come. Maybe he won’t be able to come. She was obviously wrong. I will definitely go with you.

77

Adverbs of Speaker’s Attitude

20 Adverbs

‫ بص راحة‬əbsˤaraaħa ‫ مع احت رامي‬maʕ əħtəraami

‫ لألسف‬ləlʔasaf

honestly with due respect unfortunately

‫ الحمدلله‬əlħamdəllaah fortunately personally ‫ عن نفسي‬ʕan nafsi ‫ بالغلط‬bəlɣalatˤ

accidentally

Examples

‫ عن نفسي أنا ما حب الع زايم‬ʕan nafsi ʔana maa ħəb ‫لألسف ما حضرت الحفلة‬ ‫بص راحة ما كنت طالعة‬

əlʕəzaajəm ləl ʔasaf maa ħəðˤart əl ħafla bsˤaraaħa maa kənt tˤaalʕa

‫ الحمدلله ما فاتنا الفلم‬əlħəmdəllaah maa faatna əlfəlm

Personally, I don’t like gatherings. Unfortunately, I didn’t attend the party. Honestly, I wasn’t outside. Fortunately, we didn’t miss the movie.

Practice Glossary

‫ حفلة‬ħafla ‫البيت‬ ‫المسكون‬ ‫فعالية‬ ‫أقترح‬ ‫ربية‬ ‫يدي ويدوه‬

78

party haunted house

‫اسوارة‬ ‫عصير‬ ‫يقعد‬ ‫يحضر‬ ‫يدخل‬ ‫يعامل‬ ‫يدرس‬ ‫يحط‬ ّ ‫يح‬ ‫صل‬ ‫يركض‬

əlbeet əlmaskuun faʕaalijja ʔaqtərəħ rəbbijja jaddi w jaddooh əswaara ʕasˤiir jəgʕəd jəħðˤar jədxəl jʕaaməl jədrəs jhətˤ jħasˤsˤəl jərkəðˤ

‫ياكس‬ ‫يتدرب‬ ‫يجاوب‬ ‫يتكلم‬

jaakəl jəddarrab jəʤaawəb jətkallam

eat exercise answer talk

event I recommend coin grandfather and grandmother bracelet juice sit attend go inside treat study put find run

‫ السالفة‬əssaalfa ‫ صبح‬sˤəbħ

issue/matter morning

‫ربيع‬ ‫أظافر‬ ‫كرسي‬ ‫يتمشى‬

rəbiiʕ ʔaðˤaafər kərsi jətmaʃʃa

friend nails chair take a walk

ّ ‫يح‬ ‫صل‬ ‫أبا‬ ‫يزور‬ ‫يتسبح‬ ‫يسير‬ ‫ذكي‬ ‫أتفق‬ ‫يصوم‬ ‫زعالن‬ ‫مب‬ ‫مقبول‬ ‫جديمة‬ ‫عسى‬ ‫بخوف‬

jħasˤsˤəl jəba jzuur jətsabbaħ jsiir ðaki ʔattəfəq jsˤuum zaʕlaan mub maqbuul ʤədiima ʕasa bxoof

find want visit takes a shower go smart I agree fast sad inappropriate old (f) hopefully scaredly

Exercise 20.1

20

Fill in the blanks using the correct adverb based on the English translation. a.

Adverbs

‫ _______ ___ أقدر أحضر الحفلة‬ʔagdar

b.

___ ‫دخلت البيت المسكون‬

c.

________‫بعاملها‬

d.

‫بدرس______حق االمتحان‬

e.

______‫كان يسير الجامعة‬

f.

‫______ أقترح هالفلم‬

‫عندي _____ خمسين ربية‬ ‫جديمة‬ h. ‫هو _______ ذكي‬ i. ‫سارة _______ تدرس‬ j. _______ ‫ها مب مهم‬ g.

Hopefully, I will be able to attend the party. I went inside the haunted house scaredly. I will treat her respectfully. badrəs _______ ħag I will study well for the ləmtəħaan exam. kaan jruuħ lʤaamʕa He used to go to the _______ university unwillingly. ______ ʔaʕqtərəħ I absolutely recommend halfəlm this movie. ʕəndi ______ xamsiin I have approximately 50 rəbbijja ʤədiima old coins. huu _______ ðaki He is quite smart. saara ______ tədrəs Sarah barely studies. haa mub muhəm ____ This is utterly not important. ʔaħðˤar əlħafla dəxalt əl beet əlmaskuun _______ baʕaaməlha _______

Exercise 20.2 Fill in the correct adverbs of time based on the English translation. a.

‫ _______ ___ زرت يدي ويدوه‬zərt jaddi w

b. c. d.

___ ‫تسبحت‬ ___ ‫بصوم‬ ___ ‫سرت بوظبي‬

e.

___ ‫بسوي أظافري‬

I visited my grandparents yesterday. I took a shower today. I will fast tomorrow. I recently went to Abu Dhabi. basawwi ʔaðˤaafri _____ I will do my nails later. jaddooh tsabbaħt ________ basˤuum ________ sərt buðˤabi ________

Exercise 20.3 Fill in the blanks with the suitable adverb of place based on the English translation. a. b. c. d.

___ ‫ حطيت العصير‬hatˤtˤeet əlʕasˤiir _____ I put the juice inside. ___ ‫ بتحصل الكرسي‬batħasˤsˤəl əlkərsi _____ You’ll find a chair backwards. I am sitting here.

___ ‫ أنا قاعدة‬ʔana gaaʕda _____ ّ ‫ ح‬hasˤsˤalt ləswaara _____ I found the bracelet ___ ‫ص لت االسوارة‬ downstairs.

79

Exercise 20.4

20 Adverbs

Fill in the blanks with the suitable adverb of frequency based on the English translation. a. b. c.

___ ‫ أحب أركض‬ʔaħəb ʔarkəðˤ ___ I like to run occasionally. ‫ سارة ___ تاكل أسكريم‬saara _____ taakəl Sarah often eats ice cream. ʔaskəriim

‫ أحمد ___ يتدرب الصبح‬ʔaħmad _____

‫__ ما أحضر حفالت نفس‬ ‫جيه‬ e. ‫___ تزور ربعها‬

d.

jəddarrab əsˤsˤəbħ _____ maa ʔaħðˤar ħaflaat nafs ʧii _____ tzuur rabəʕha

Ahmad normally exercises in the morning. I seldom attend such parties. She visits her friends frequently.

Exercise 20.5 Translate the following English sentences into Emirati Arabic.

80

a. She answered coldly. b. He talked stubbornly. c. It is an utterly inappropriate action. d. I was slightly sad. e. We’ll talk later. f. I will take a walk tonight. g. I will go there. h. I find this everywhere.

UNIT 21 Prepositions

As the term suggests, prepositions are a word class, which is always used before a noun or a noun phrase. They are mainly used to express the spatial (e.g., ‘on’, ‘at’), temporal (e.g., ‘before’, ‘after’), and possessive (e.g., ‘of’, ‘by’) relationship. Emirati Arabic prepositions can be simple (cf. English ‘in’, ‘at’) or complex (cf. English ‘under’, ‘around’). Some simple prepositions are independent words (e.g., ‘from’), yet others such as ‘by’ and ‘to’, etc., are prefixes (see Unit 5).

Simple Prepositions ‫ﻓ‬/‫في‬ -‫ﺑ‬ ‫مع‬/‫ويا‬ - ‫ﻋ‬/‫على‬

fii/fbwijja/maʕa ʕala/ʕ-

in/at in/by/with with on

to/until - ‫ ﻟ‬lee/labout/than ‫ عن‬ʕan - ‫ﻣ‬/‫ من‬mən/m- from/since/than

On the other hand, complex prepositions differ in that they contain a triconsonantal root. Some complex prepositions contain more than one word, e.g., ‫ فالنص‬f(ə) nnəsˤsˤ ‘in the middle’.

Complex Prepositions ‫عقب‬ ‫صوب‬ ‫قبل‬ ‫جبال‬ ‫تحت‬ ‫جدام‬ ‫فوق‬ ‫ورا‬ ‫داخل‬ ‫برع‬

ʕəg(ə)b sˤoob gabəl ʤbaal/gbaal taħat ʤəddaam/gəddam foog wara daaxəl barraʕ

after near before across under in front of above behind inside outside

‫حذال‬ ‫عند‬ ‫حول‬ ‫عدال‬ ‫فالنص‬ ‫يانب‬ ‫مقابل‬ ‫قريب‬ ‫حق‬ ‫جدى‬

ħðaal ʕənd ħool ʕəddaal f(ə)nnəsˤsˤ jaanəb mgaabəl/mʤaabəl griib/ʤriib ħag ʤəda

beside with/of around beside in the middle beside opposite close to for/to towards

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-21

81

Some examples of simple and complex prepositions are shown here:

21 Prepositions

‫فالبيت‬ ‫من الكويت‬ ‫ويا أهلي‬ ‫حول الحارة‬ ‫عدال الدريشة‬ ‫بالكوري‬ ‫عقب المباراة‬ ‫صوب الجمعية‬ ‫فوق الطاولة‬ ‫ورا المدرسة‬

fəlbeet mən ləkweet wijja ʔahli ħool əlħaara ʕəddaal əddəriiʃa bəl kuuri ʕəgəb ləmbaaraa sˤoob əlʤamʕijja foog ətˤtˤaawla wara əlmadrəsah

in the house from Kuwait with my parents around the neighborhood beside the window in Korean after the match near the grocery store on the table behind the school

Possessive Prepositions In Emirati Arabic, possessive constructions (see Unit 27) can also be expressed by using the preposition ‫ عند‬ʕənd ‘to’. Notice that ‫ عند‬ʕənd always carries a suffix pronoun.

‫ عندي فلوس‬ʕəndi fluus ‫ كان عندي سلحفاة‬kaan ʕəndi səlħəfaah

I have money. I had a turtle.

The Preposition ‫ حق‬ħag ‘for/to’ and ‫ ايّ ا‬əjja ‘to’ In Emirati Arabic, double object constructions can be formed by the preposition ‫حق‬ ħag ‘for/to’ or the linking participle ‫ ايّا‬əjja ‘to’. The major function of ‫ ايّا‬əjja is to connect the direct or indirect object, which is a pronoun. The usage of ‫ حق‬ħag and ‫ ايّا‬əjja is illustrated in the following examples:

‫ مريم طرشت رسالة حق سارة‬marjam tˤarrəʃat rəsaala ‫زايد طبخ بانكيك حق أمه‬ ‫نوف س وّت اسوارة حق إيمان‬ ‫مريم طرشتلها اياها‬ ‫نوف سوتلها اياها‬ ‫عليا ش رتله اياه‬ 82

ħag saara zaajəd tˤəbax baankeek ħag ummah noof sawwat əswaara ħag ʔiimaan marjam tˤarrəʃatəlha əjjaaha noof sawwatəlha əjjaaha ʕalja ʃaratlah əjjaah

Mariam sent a letter to Sara. Zayed cooked pancakes for his mother. Nouf made a bracelet for Eman. Mariam sent it to her. Nouf made it for her. Alia bought it for him.

It should be pointed out that the linking preposition ‫ ايّا‬əjja can also be suffixed with the direct object pronoun, illustrated in the following cases. Notice that the verb may be followed by another preposition -‫ ﻟ‬l- ‘to’:

‫ علي طرشلها اياه‬ʕəli tˤarraʃəlha əjjah Ali sent it to her. (lit. Ali sent her it.) Ali gave it to her. (lit. Ali gave her it.) ‫ علي عطاها اياه‬ʕəli ʕatˤaaha əjjah

21 Prepositions

Practice Glossary

‫مدرسة‬ ‫كريمة‬ ‫مباراة‬ ‫جمعية‬ ‫حارة‬ ‫يرسم‬ ‫لوحة‬ ‫يخيط‬ ‫بنت‬ ‫فستان‬

madrəsa kreema mbaaraa ʤamʕijja ħaara jərsəm looħa jxajjətˤ bənt fəstaan

school cream match association neighborhood draw painting sew daughter dress

‫ربع‬ ‫بيت‬ ‫دريشة‬ ‫كيسة‬ ‫اخت‬ ‫دوا‬ ‫كرسي‬ ‫ا ّم اية‬

rabəʕ beet dəriiʃa ʧiisa/kiisa əxt dəwa kərsi ummaaja

friends house window bag sister medicine chair mom

Exercise 21.1 Match the following Emirati Arabic sentences with the correct English translation. a. b. c. d. e.

‫أكبر عنها‬ ‫مع ربعي‬ ‫بالكريمة‬ ‫فالمدرسة‬ ‫أطول منه‬

ʔakbar ʕanha

1.

with my friends

maʕa rabʕi

2.

in the school

bəl kreema

3.

older than her

fəl madrəsa

4.

taller than him

ʔatˤwal mənnah

5.

with the cream

Exercise 21.2 Translate the following Emirati Arabic prepositional phrases in English. a. b. c. d. e.

‫فوق الكبت‬ ‫ورا المطعم‬ ‫داخل العلبة‬ ‫ب را المحل‬ ‫فنص الغرفة‬

foog əlkabat wara əlmatˤʕam daaxəl əlʕəlba barra əlmaħal fnəsˤsˤ əlɣərfa 83

Exercise 21.3

21 Prepositions

Rewrite the following ditransitive sentences by using the particle ‫ ايّا‬əjja. a.

84

‫ راوية رسمتلي اللوحة‬raawja rəsmatli

b.

‫سالم عطى اخته الكيسة‬

c.

‫أختي عطت بنتها الدوا‬

d.

‫ابويا سوالي كرسي‬

e.

‫اماية خيطتلي فستان‬

əllooħa saaləm ʕatˤa əxta əlʧiisa əxti ʕətˤat bəntha əddəwa əbuuja sawwaali kərsi ummaaja xajjətˤtatli fəstaan

Rawya drew me the painting. Salem gave the bag to his sister. My sister gave medicine to her daughter. Dad made me a chair. Mom sewed me a dress.

UNIT 22 Quantifiers

Quantifiers are a grammatical category that expresses the quantity of a set of entities. This unit focuses on generalized quantifiers, which do not specify the number of the set members. Emirati Arabic quantifiers may modify definite and indefinite expressions depending on the intended interpretation.

‫كل‬ ‫وايد‬ ‫معظم‬ ‫أي‬ ‫ك ّم ن‬

kəl waajəd muʕðˤam ʔaj kammən

all/every/each many/much/a lot of most any few of

‫نص‬ ‫بعض‬ ‫شوية‬ ‫نتفة‬

nəsˤ baʕðˤ ʃwajja nətfa

half some/several some/little a bit of

The following quantifiers are considered indefinite expressions: Every girl is pretty. ‫ كل بنت حلوة‬kəl bənt ħəlwa tʃəft waajəd maʃaahiir I saw many celebrities ‫شفت وايد مشاهير أمس‬ ʔams

yesterday.

hədiijja ħag rəbiiʕaati

for my friends.

‫ أي واحد يقدر ايي‬ʔaj waaħəd jəgdar əjji Anyone can come. I bought a few gifts ‫ خذتلي ك ّم ن هدية حق ربيعاتي‬xaðtli kammən Indefinite quantification is also used in question formation:

‫ أي واحد تبا تجرب؟‬ʔaj waaħəd təba tʤarrəb? Which one do you want to try? Do you have any food? ‫ عندك أي أكل؟‬ʕəndək ʔaj ʔakəl? Some quantifiers, e.g., the definite prefix [əl-]).

‫ نص‬nəsˤ ‘half’ can also take a definite expression (with

‫ معظم الكتب يديدة‬muʕðˤam əlkətəb jədiida Most of the books are new. Half of the clothes got dirty. ‫ نص المالبس خاست‬nəsˤ əlmalaabəs xaasat baʕðˤ ənnaas raaħ Some of the people will ‫بعض الناس راح يعيبهم‬ jʕajəbhum

like it.

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-22

85

22 Quantifiers

The quantifier ‫[ كل‬kəl] ‘all’ can also take the object suffix to express the meaning such as ‘all of them’:

‫ كل الطالب غايبين‬kəl ətˤtˤəllaab ɣaajbiin All students are absent. All of the food has run out. ‫ كل األكل خلص‬kəl əlʔakəl xallasˤ All of them disappeared. ‫ كلهم اختفوا‬kəlhum əxtəfaw Many quantifiers can express partitive constructions by using the preposition

‫[ من‬mən] ‘in/of’:

‫ وايد منهم رقصوا أمس‬waajəd mənhum ‫وايد من الضيوف بعدهم ما يو‬ ‫عطني شوية من العيش‬ ‫خذت نتفة من الكيكة‬

rəgsˤaw ʔams waajəd mən əðˤðˤəjuuf baʕadhum maa jaw ʕatˤni ʃwajja mən əlʕeeʃ xaðt nətfa mən əlkeeka

Many of them danced yesterday. Many of the guests aren’t here yet. Give me a little bit of the rice. I took a tiny bit of the cake.

Practice Glossary come ‫ ايي‬əjji ‫ امتحان‬əmtəħaan exam ħala dessert lose ّ ‫ ي‬jðˤajjəʕ ‫حال‬ ‫ض يع‬ jəħtərəg get burnt jtˤər cut ‫يحترق‬ ‫يطر‬

Exercise 22.1 Fill in the missing quantifying expressions based on the given Emirati Arabic sentences. a. b.

əðˤtˤar jəmtəħən

c.

‫ وايد منكم ما يو‬waajəd mənkum

d.

‫ معظم الكتب ضاعت‬muʕðˤam əlkətəb

e. f. g. 86

‫ كلكم تعالوا‬kəlkum taʕaalu ‫ كل واحد فيهم اضطر يمتحن‬kəl waaħəd fiihum maa jaw

‫أي حد يقدر ايي‬ ‫نص االكل احترق‬ ‫بعض المالبس انطرت‬

ðˤaaʕat ʔaj ħad jəgdar əjji nəsˤ əlʔakl əħtərag baʕðˤ əlmalaabəs ntˤarrat

______ come. ______ had to take the exam. ______ didn’t come. ______ are lost. ______ can come. ______ got burnt. ______ got teared.

h.

‫ عطني شوية من البسكوت‬ʕatˤni ʃwajja mən

i.

‫باخذ نتفة من الحال‬

j.

‫ما عندي اال ك ّم ن حبة‬

əlbaskoot baaxəð nətfa mən əlħala maa ʕəndi əlla kammən ħabba

Give me ______ from the biscuits. I will take ______ of the dessert. I don’t have but ______ of it.

22 Quantifiers

87

UNIT 23 Numerals

The system of numerals in Emirati Arabic shares almost all its features with other Arabic dialects (including Modern Standard Arabic). The basic cardinal numerals start from zero to ten. The numerals ‫ أحد عشر‬ħidaʕʃ ‘eleven’ to ‫ تسعة عشر‬tisaʕtˤaʕʃ ‘nineteen’ contain the suffix ‫ عشر‬-aʕʃ(r) which corresponds to English ‘-teen’. Except for the numerals ‫ أحد عشر‬ħidaʕʃ ‘eleven’ and ‫ اثنا عشر‬θnaʕʃ ‘twelve’, the numerals ‫ ثالثة عشر‬θalatˤtˤaʕʃ ‘thirteen’ to ‫ تسعة عشر‬tisaʕtˤaʕʃ ‘nineteen’ contain the stem, which refers to the single-digit numeral.  

‫ صفر‬sʕəfər ‫ واحد‬waaħəd

‫ تسعة‬təsʕa ‫ عشرة‬ʕaʃr(a)

9 10

‫ثالثين‬ ‫تسعة‬ ‫وثالثين‬ ‫أربعين‬ ‫خمسين‬ ‫ستين‬ ‫سبعين‬ ‫ثمانين‬ ‫تسعين‬ ‫تسعة‬ ‫وتسعين‬ ‫مئة‬ ‫مئة وواحد‬

‫ أحد عشر‬ħidaʕʃ(ar)

11

‫مئة وعشرة‬

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

‫مئتين‬ ‫ثالثمائه‬ ‫أربع مائة‬ ‫ألف‬ ‫ألف وواحد‬ ‫عشرة آالف‬ ‫مئة ألف‬ ‫عشرة ماليين‬ ‫بليون‬

‫اثنين‬ ‫ثالثة‬ ‫أربعة‬ ‫خمسة‬ ‫ستة‬ ‫سبعة‬ ‫ثمانية‬

88

‫إثنا عشر‬ ‫ثالثة عشر‬ ‫أربعة عشر‬ ‫خمسة عشر‬ ‫ستة عشر‬ ‫سبعة عشر‬ ‫ثمانية عشر‬ ‫تسعة عشر‬ ‫عشرين‬

ʔəθneen θalaaθa ʔarbaʕa xamsa sətta sabʕa θəmaanja

θnaʕʃ(ar) θalatʕtʕaʕʃ(ar) ʔarbaʕtʕaʕʃ(ar) xaməstʕaʕʃ(ar) sətʕtʕaʕʃ(ar) sabəʕtʕaʕʃ(ar) θəməntʕaʕʃ(ar) təsaʕtʕaʕʃ(ar) ʕəʃriin

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-23

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

θalaaθiin təsʕa w θalaaθiin ʔarbəʕiin xamsiin səttiin sabʕiin θəmaaniin təsʕiin təsʕa w təsʕiin ʔəmja ʔəmja w waaħəd ʔəmja w ʕaʃr(a) miiteen θalaaθəmja ʔarbaʕəmja ʔalf ʔalf w waħəd ʕaʃərtalaaf ʔəmjat-ʔalf ʕaʃrat-malajiin bəljoon

30 39 40 50 60 70 80 90 99 100 101 110 200 300 400 1000 1001 10000 100000 10000000 1000000000

Higher numerals (e.g., hundreds and above) are usually formed by coordination (see Unit 36). The word order is similar to many other languages, i.e., thousands are followed by hundreds, which in turn are followed by tens:

‫أربعمية وسبعة وثالثين‬ ‫خمسمية وخمسة وخمسين‬ ‫عشر االف وأربعين‬ ‫أربعةعشر ألف وثمانمية‬ ‫وسبعة وستين‬

ʔarbaʕəmja w sabʕa w θalaaθiin xamsəmja w xamsa w xamsiin ʕaʃər taalaaf w ʔarbəʕiin ʔarbaʕtʕaʕʃar ʔalf w θəmaanəmja w sabʕa w səttiin

23 Numerals

437 555 10040 14867

The numerals ‫ ثالث‬θalaaθ ‘three’ to ‫ عشرة‬ʕaʃər ‘ten’ can be masculine or feminine depending on the gender of its modified noun: Masculine

‫واحد‬ ‫اثنين‬ ‫ثالث‬ ‫أربع‬ ‫خمس‬ ‫ست‬ ‫سبع‬ ‫ثمان‬ ‫تسع‬ ‫عشر‬

waaħəd ʔəθneen θalaaθ ʔarbaʕ xams sətt sabəʕ θəmaan təsəʕ ʕaʃər

Feminine

‫واحدة‬ ‫اثنتين‬ ‫ثالثة‬ ‫أربعة‬ ‫خمسة‬ ‫ستة‬ ‫سبعة‬ ‫ثمانية‬ ‫تسعة‬ ‫عشرة‬

wəħda θənteen θalaaθa ʔarbaʕa xamsa sətta sabʕa θəmaanja təsʕa ʕaʃra

one two three four five six seven eight nine ten

The unmarked masculine form is preferably used for the numerals ‘three’ to ‘ten’, even if the head noun is feminine: Plural Masculine Noun

‫ثالث أكياس‬ ‫أربع كتب‬ ‫خمس ك راسي‬ ‫سبع قمصان‬ ‫ثالث أمي رات‬ ‫خمس معلمات‬ ‫ست مخدات‬

θalaaθ ʔakjaas ʔarbaʕ kətəb xams karaasi sabəʕ gəmsˤaan θalaaθ ʔamiir-aat xams mʕalmaat sətt maxadda-at

three bags four books five chairs seven shirts three (female) princesses five (female) teachers six pillows

Ordinal Numerals The ordinal numbers from ‫ أول‬ʔawwal ‘first’ to ‫ عاشر‬ʕaaʃər ‘tenth’ can be masculine or feminine depending on the gender of the head noun. From ‫ إحدى عشر‬ħidaʕʃ ‘eleventh’ onwards, the original numerals are lexically identical to their cardinal

89

numeral counterparts. Ordinal numerals can precede or follow the head noun. If they follow the head noun, they agree with it in gender and definiteness.

23 Numerals

Masculine Feminine

‫أولى‬/ ‫ أول‬ʔawwal

‫واحد‬ ‫وعشرين‬ θaanjah second ‫اثنين‬ ‫وعشرين‬ θaalθah third ‫ثالثين‬ raabʕah fourth ‫أربعين‬ xaamsah fifth ‫خمسين‬ saadsah sixth ‫ستين‬ saabʕah seventh ‫سبعين‬ θaamnah eighth ‫ثمانين‬ taasʕah ninth ‫تسعين‬ ʕaaʃrah tenth ‫مئة‬ 11th ‫ألف‬ 12th ‫مليون‬ ʔuula

‫ثانية‬/‫ ثاني‬θaani ‫ثالثة‬/‫ثالث‬ ‫رابعة‬/‫رابع‬ ‫خامسة‬/‫خامس‬ ‫سادسة‬/‫سادس‬ ‫سابعة‬/‫سابع‬ ‫ثامنة‬/‫ثامن‬ ‫تاسعة‬/‫تاسع‬ ‫عاشرة‬/‫عاشر‬ ‫إحدى عشر‬ ‫إثنى عشر‬ ‫ثالثة عشر‬ ‫أربعة عشر‬ ‫خمسة عشر‬ ‫ستة عشر‬ ‫سبعة عشر‬ ‫ثمانية عشر‬ ‫تسعة عشر‬

Meaning

θaaləθ raabəʕ xaaməs saadəs saabəʕ θaamən taasəʕ ʕaaʃər ħədaʕʃ əθnaʕʃ θalatʕtʕaʕʃ ʔrbaʕtʕaʕʃ xaməstʕaʕʃ sətʕtʕaʕʃ sabaʕtʕaʕʃ θəmantʕaʕʃ təsəʕtʕaʕʃ

first

13th 14th 15th 16th 17th 18th 19th

waħəd w ʕəʃriin θneen w ʕəʃriin θalaaθiin ʔarbəʕiin xamsiin səttiin sabʕiin θəmaaniin təsʕiin ʔəmja ʔalf maljoon

21st 22nd 30th 40th 50th 60th 70th 80th 90th 100th 1000th millionth

Examples third book ‫ ثالث كتاب‬θaaləθ  ktaab ‫ القلم االول‬əlgalam əlʔawwal the first pen the first paper ‫ الورقة األولى‬əlwərga əlʔuula

Months of the Year Numerals are used to express months of the year:

90

‫شهر واحد‬ ‫شهر اثنين‬ ‫شهر ثالثة‬ ‫شهر أربعة‬ ‫شهر خمسة‬ ‫شهر ستة‬

ʃahr waaħəd ʃahr θneen ʃahr θalaaθa ʃahr ʔarbaʕa ʃahr xamsa ʃahr səttta

January February March April May June

‫شهر سبعة‬ ‫شهر ثمانية‬ ‫شهر تسعة‬ ‫شهر عشرة‬ ‫شهر حد عشر‬ ‫شهر اثني عشر‬

ʃahr sabʕa ʃahr θəmaanja ʃahr təsʕa ʃahr ʕaʃra ʃahr hədaʕʃ ʃahr θnaʕʃ

July August September October November December

Days of the Week

23

Some days of the week may be morphologically related to numerals:

‫االثنين‬ ‫الثالثا‬ ‫الربعا‬ ‫الخميس‬

larbəʕa

‫ الجمعة‬ljəmʕa Friday ‫ السبت‬əssabt Saturday Wednesday ‫ االحد‬laħad Sunday

lxəmiis

Thursday

laθneen

Monday

əθθalaaθa

Tuesday

Numerals

In the expressions of dates, the order is always day-month-year. Only the numerals are needed, and the word ‫ شهر‬ʃahr ‘month’ is omitted:

‫ واحد ستة ألفين وعشرين‬waaħəd sətta ʔalfeen w ‫أربعة سبعة ألفين وواحد وعشرين‬ ‫عشرة عشرة ألف وتسمعمية‬ ‫وواحد وتسعين‬

ʕəʃriin ʔarbaʕa sabʕa ʔalfeen w waaħəd w ʕəʃriin ʕaʃra ʕaʃra ʔalf w təsʕəmja w waaħəd w təsʕiin

June 1, 2020 July 4, 2021 October 10, 1991

Practice Glossary

‫قلم‬ ‫بنت‬ ‫ياي‬ ‫طابق‬ ‫مدينة‬ ‫لبان‬ ‫بروحها‬ ‫يتخرج‬ ‫يختار‬ ‫يسافر‬

galam bənt jaaj tʕaabəq madiina lbaan bruuħha jətxarraʤ jəxtaar jsaafər

pen girl next floor city chewing gum herself graduate choose travel

‫ورقة‬ ‫ريّال‬ ‫جواب‬ ‫شخص‬ ‫دولة‬ ‫طول‬ ‫وزن‬ ‫يبدا‬ ‫يخلّ ص‬ ‫يكون‬

wərga rajjaal ʤawaab ʃaxsʕ doola tˤuul wazn jəbda jxalləsˤ jkuun

paper man answer person country height weight start finish be

Exercise 23.1 Translate the following cardinal numerals in Emirati Arabic. a. 98 b. 23 c. 64 d. 432 e. 20042

91

Exercise 23.2

23 Numerals

Translate the following numeral expressions in English. a. b. c. d. e.

‫ثامن طابق‬ ‫ثاني شخص‬ ‫أول مدينة‬ ‫خامس دولة‬ ‫عاشر مكان‬

θaamən tʕaabəq θaani ʃaxsʕ ʔawwal madiina xaaməs doola ʕaaʃər məkaan

Exercise 23.3 Fill in the blanks based on the English translation. a.

‫ بسافر ________ الياي‬basaafər ________ I will travel next

b.

‫ بتخرج ________ الياي‬batxarraʤ

c. d. e.

ljaaj

Thursday.

________ ljaaj

‫ العيد راح يكون ________ الياي‬lʕiid raaħ jkuun ________ ljaaj

________ ‫ رمضان بيبدا يوم‬rəmðˤaan bajəbda joom ________

________ ‫ بخلص يوم‬baxalləsˤ joom ________

I will graduate next Sunday. Eid will be next Saturday. Ramadan will start on Wednesday. I will finish on Tuesday.

Exercise 23.4 Match the following dates with the correct Emirati Arabic expressions.

‫اثني عشر واحد ألفين‬ ‫واربعة عشر‬ b. October 19, 2020 2. ‫ستة اثنين الفين واثنين‬ c. October 23, 1998 3. ‫ثالثة وعشرين عشرة ألف‬ ‫وتسعمية وثمانية وتسعين‬ a. August 8, 2015

1.

d. February 6, 2002 4. e. January 12, 2014 5.

92

θnaʕʃ waaħəd ʔalfeen warbʕatˤaʕʃ sətta θneen ʔalfeen w θneen θalaaθa w ʕəʃriin ʕaʃra ʔalf w təsʕəmja w θəmaanja w təsʕiin təsaʕtˤaʕʃ ʕaʃra ʔalfeen w ʕəʃriin

‫تسعة عشر عشرة الفين‬ ‫وعشرين‬ ‫ ثمانية ثمانية ألفين‬θəmaanja θəmaanja ʔalfeen ‫ وخمسة عشر‬w xaməstˤaʕʃ

UNIT 24 Modality

Modality concerns the grammatical expressions of possibility and necessity. In Emirati Arabic, modality can be expressed by modal auxiliaries (cf. English auxiliary verbs such as ‘will’, ‘may’, ‘must’, etc.).

‫الزم‬ ‫ضروري‬ ‫المفروض‬ ‫الزم‬ ‫عادي‬ ‫جان‬ ‫يمكن‬

laazəm ðˁaruuri (əl)mafruuðˁ laazəm ʕaadi ʧaan jəmkən

must must/should should must may would may

‫ممكن‬ ‫يروم‬ ‫طبيعي‬ ‫مستحيل‬ ‫البد‬ ‫احتمال‬

mumkən jruum tˁabiiʕi mustaħiil laabəd əħtəmaal

may/possible can normal impossible must probably

Modal auxiliaries always precede the main verb.

‫ سارة الزم تخلّ ص اليوم‬saara laazəm txalləsˁ ‫عايشة المفروض تسامح أختها‬ ‫سالم يمكن ايي اليوم‬ ‫يمكن أخلص وايي‬ ‫الزم تاكل زين‬ ‫محمد ضروري يحل الواجب‬ ‫احتمال ما اسافر وياكم‬

əljoom ʕaajʃa əlmafruuðˁ tsaaməħ əxətha saaləm jəmkən əjji əljoom jəmkən ʔaxalləsˁ w ʔaji laazəm taakəl zeen mħammad ðˁaruuri jħəl əlwaaʤəb əħtəmaal maa ʔasaafər wijjaakum

Sarah must finish today. Aisha should forgive her sister. Salem may come today. I may finish and come. You must eat well. Mohammad must do the homework. I probably won’t travel with you.

Some modal auxiliaries can function as adjectives, followed by the embedded clause formed by the complementizer ‫ ان‬ənnah ‘that’.

‫ المفروض انه سارة ما تقول شي‬əlmafruuðˁ ənnah ‫ضروري انه محمد يخلص شغله‬

saara maa tguul ʃaj ðˁaruuri ənnah mħammad jxalləsˁ ʃəɣlah

Sarah shouldn’t say anything. It’s important that Mohammad finishes his work.

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-24

93

Verbs of Modality

24 Modality

In addition to modal auxiliaries, main verbs that express possibility, necessity, wish, and intention can also be used.

‫توقع‬ ‫سمح‬ ‫عرف‬ ‫بغا‬ ‫تأ ّم ل‬

twaqqaʕ səmaħ ʕəraf bəɣa tʔammal

expected allowed knew wanted hoped

‫قصد‬ ‫تمنى‬ ‫وافق‬ ‫قدر‬ ‫احتاج‬

gəsˁad tmanna waafag gədar əħtaaj

intended wished agreed can/was able needed

These modal verbs can be followed by an embedded clause:

‫ أتوقع انها بتفوز‬ʔatwaqqaʕ ənha batfuuz I expect that she will win. ‫ أتمنى انه ينجح‬ʔatmanna ənnah jənʤaħ I hope (wish) he succeeds. I hoped to graduate this ‫ كنت متاملة اتخرج هالسنة‬kənt mətʔamla ʔatxarraʤ hassəna

year.

Practice Glossary

94

‫يحضر‬ ‫يطلع‬ ‫اي‬ ‫ينام‬ ‫يقدر‬ ‫يشل‬ ‫تسامح‬ ‫يمرض‬ ‫يقول‬ ‫يخلص‬ ‫يحضر‬ ‫يكسر‬ ‫يطبخ‬ ‫يقعد‬ ‫يدفع‬ ‫يتكلم‬ ‫يوقف‬ ‫يخاف‬ ‫أتأكد‬ ‫ياخذ‬ ‫يسير‬

jəħðˁar jətˁlaʕ əjjii jnaam jəgdar jʃəl tsaaməħ jəmraðˁ jguul jxalləsˁ jəħðˁar jəksər jətˁbax jəgʕəd jədfaʕ jətkallam juugaf jaxaaf ʔatt(ʔ)akkad jaaxəð jsiir

attend go out come sleep can lift forgive get sick say finish eat break cook sit pay talk stand get scared ensure take go

‫ينظف‬ ‫يساعد‬ ‫يزعل‬ ‫يسوق‬ ‫يفوز‬ ‫واجب‬ ‫البيت‬ ‫دوا‬ ‫مخلص‬ ‫شغل‬ ‫صحن‬ ‫كالم‬ ‫باجر‬ ‫مؤدب‬ ‫تأخير‬ ‫جواب‬ ‫ح رامي‬ ‫التخرج‬ ‫اليوم‬ ‫خضار‬ ‫فواكه‬

jnaðˁðˁəf jsaaʕəd jəzʕal jsuug jfuuz waaʤəb beet dəwa mxalləsˁ ʃəɣəl sˁaħn kalaam baaʧər mʔaddab taʔxiir ʤawaab ħaraami taxarruʤ joom xəðˁaar fawaakəh

clean help get sad drive win homework home medicine finished (noun) work plate talking (noun) tomorrow polite delay answer thief graduation today vegetables fruits

‫يركض‬ ‫يسافر‬ ‫يضحك‬ ‫علوم‬ ‫أخو‬ ‫حل‬ ‫كرة الطايرة‬ ‫غرفة‬ ‫شاي‬

jərkəðˁ jsaafər jəðˁħak ʕuluum əxu ħall kurat ətˁtˁaajra ɣərfa ʃaaj

run travel laugh science brother solution volleyball room tea

‫صحة‬ ‫قانون‬ ‫جمعية‬ ‫محاضرة‬ ‫بعدين‬ ‫قصة‬

sˁəħħa qawaaniin ʤamʕijja muħaaðˁara baʕdeen qəsˁsˁa

health rule grocery store lecture later story

24 Modality

Exercise 24.1 Fill in the blanks with the proper modal auxiliary based on the English translation. a. b.

‫ ____ _______تخلص دراسة‬txalləsˁ dəraasa You must finish studying. ‫ _______ _______تييب أمك‬tiib əmmək You ought to bring your

mom. ______ naakəl əlħiin We are supposed to eat now.

e.

‫_______ناكل الحين‬ ‫ _______ _______أتأخر‬ʔattaxxar ‫ أحمد _______ يتريق‬ʔaħmad _______

f.

‫األكل _______ للبيت‬

c. d.

I may be late.

Ahmad can have breakfast. jətrajjag lakəl _______ ləlbeet the necessary food for the house

Exercise 24.2 Fill in the blanks with the proper modal adverb based on the English translation.

‫_________ طلع‬ b. ‫_________ بنسافر‬ c. ‫_____ نظفت الغرفة‬ d. ‫_________ مؤدب‬ a.

_________ tˁalaʕ

Maybe he went out.

_________ bansaafər

We will probably travel.

_______ naðˁðˁaft əlɣərfa

I surely cleaned the room.

_________ muʔaddab

He’s supposedly polite.

Exercise 24.3 Translate the following Emirati Arabic expressions in English. a. b. c.

‫ الزم أسير‬laazəm ʔasiir ‫ عادي أطلع‬ʕaadi ʔatˁlaʕ ‫ يمكن أكنسل‬jəmkən ʔakansəl

95

24

d.

Modality

e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l.

‫طبيعي أضحك‬ ‫مستحيل أخاف‬ ‫الزم أتأكد‬ ‫احتمال أزعل‬ ‫الزم تحضرين التخرج‬ ‫ضروري تيين باجر‬ ‫المفروض تنام‬ ‫ممكن ما أقدر أطلع‬ ‫ما يروم يشله‬

tˁabiiʕi ʔaðˁħak mustaħiil ʔaxaaf laazem ʔattakkad əħtəmaal ʔazʕal laazəm təħðˁəriin əttaxarruʤ ðˁaruuri tiin baaʧər əlmafruuðˁ tnaam mumkən maa ʔagdar ʔatˁlaʕ maa jruum jʃəllah

Exercise 24.4 Translate the following English sentences into Emirati Arabic.

96

a. Ahmad wants to talk. b. Rashid hoped to pass. c. Ali is able to drive. d. Mariam wished to come. e. Maya expected to win.

UNIT 25 Negation

In most cases, negation in Emirati Arabic is expressed by the negative marker ‫ما‬ maa (for verbs) and ‫ مب‬mub (var. ‫ هب‬həb) (for adjectives and other non-verbal predicates). Another negative marker ‫ ال‬laa can also be used to negate statements or express negative imperatives (cf. English ‘don’t’).

‫ما‬ ‫مب‬ ‫هب‬ ‫ال‬ ‫ال… وال‬

maa mub həb laa laa . . . wala

not not not don’t, no neither…nor

to be used mainly with: verbs adjectives adjectives sentences sentences

Some examples are as follows:

‫ما خلصت ق راية‬ ‫مب حلوة الحركة‬ ‫هب جيه يطبخون‬ ‫ال تكتب هني‬ ‫ ال بمر‬،‫بمر الكوفي‬ ‫المطعم أول‬ ‫ال كتبت وال قريت‬

maa xallasˤt graaja mub ħəlwa əlħaraka hub ʧii jətˤbəxuun laa təktəb hnii bamər əlkoofi, laa bamər əlmatˤʕam ʔawwal laa kətabt wala gareet

I didn’t finish reading. The gesture is not nice. This is not how they cook. Don’t write here! I will stop by the cafe; no, I’ll stop by the restaurant first. I neither wrote nor read.

In addition to negative markers, there exist ‘negative polarity items’, which express a negative meaning in negative contexts. In English, the indefinite expression such as ‘anyone’ in ‘I have not met anyone’ is interpreted negatively. The following expressions in Emirati Arabic can also fulfill the same function:

97

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-25

‫حد‬ ‫شي‬ ‫عمر‬ ‫قد‬/‫جد‬ ‫حتى‬ ‫أبد‬ ‫موول‬ ‫بالمرة‬

25 Negation

ħad ʃaj ʕəmər ʧəd ħatta ʔabad muul bəlmarra

anyone anything ever ever even ever, at all at all at all

Negative polarity items must be accompanied by a negative marker in the same sentence, in most cases ‫ ما‬maa. Notice that expressions such as ‫ عمري‬ʕəmr ‘ever’ and ‫ أبد‬ʔabad ‘never’ appear before ‫ ما‬maa.

‫محد عطاه ويه‬ ‫ما لقيت حد‬ ‫ما عندي شي أقوله‬ ‫عمري ما راح أرضا‬ ‫ما جد شفت حد نفسه‬

maħħad ʕatˤaah wajh maa ləgeet ħad maa ʕəndi ʃaj ʔaguulah ʕəmri maa raħ ʔarðˤa maa ʧəd ʃəft ħad nafsah

‫ محمد حتى عصير ما شرب‬mħammad ħatta ʕasˤiir maa ʃarab

‫ أبد ما تكلمت عنه‬ʔabad maa tkalləmat ʕannah

‫ فاطمة موول ما تسير دبي‬faatˤma muul maa tsiir ‫ما سرت راس الخيمة بالمرة‬

dbaj maa sərt raas əlxeema bəlmarra

No one paid him attention. I didn’t find anyone. I don’t have anything to say. I will never accept. I have never seen someone like him. Mohamed didn’t even drink juice. She never talked about him. Fatma doesn’t go to Dubai at all. I didn’t go to Ras AlKhaimah at all.

Practice Glossary

98

‫يسير‬ ‫ايي‬ ‫تنورة‬ ‫يلبس‬ ‫مكان‬ ‫الحين‬ ‫يرفض‬ ‫يرد‬ ‫يبا‬

jsiir əjji tannuura jəlbas məkaan əlħiin jərfəðˤ jrəd jəba

go come skirt wear place now refuse reply want

‫دبة‬ ‫يشرب‬ ‫قميص‬ ‫آمن‬ ‫ياكل‬ ‫يسوي‬ ‫خبز‬ ‫اليوم‬ ‫علبة‬

dabba jəʃrab gəmiisˤ ʔaamən jaakəl jsawwi xəbz əljoom ʕəlba

bottle drink shirt safe eat make bread today box

Exercise 25.1

25

Match the following Emirati Arabic sentences with their English translations. a. b. c. d.

‫ال تفكر وايد‬ ‫ما شي أكل‬ ‫جد سقت سيارة؟‬ ‫ال حلو وال مالح‬

‫سارة جد سارت‬ ‫سوريا والع راق بس‬ ‫مب لبنان‬ f. ‫ما راح ياكل‬ g. ‫بسير أي مكان‬ e.

laa tfakkər waajəd maa ʃaj ʔakəl ʧad səgt sajjaara? laa ħəlu wala maaləħ saara ʧəd saarat suurja w əl ʕəraaq bas mub ləbnaan maa raaħ jaakəl basiir ʔaj məkaan

Negation

1. He won’t eat. 2. There’s no food. 3. I’ll go wherever. 4. Sarah went to Syria and Iraq before but not Lebanon. 5. Not sweet nor salty. 6. Don’t think much. 7. Have you ever driven a car?

Exercise 25.2 Fill in the blanks based on the English meaning. a.

‫ ______ _____ ____ ______ من الدبة‬mən

Don’t drink from the əddabba bottle. balbas gəmiisˤ ______ I’ll wear this shirt but not hattannuura laa this skirt.

______ ،‫بلبس هالقميص‬ ‫هالتنورة ال‬ c. ___ ____ ،‫ بخلص ق راية‬baxalləsˤ graaja, ____ I will continue reading; no ‫ ___ القصيدة أول‬əlgəsˤiida ʔawwal I’ll write the poem first. d. ‫ _______ ________ آمن هالمكان‬ʔaamən hal This place is not safe. b.

məkaan

‫ _____ ______ ______ ______ الحين‬əlħiin f. ‫ ال سويت بيت زا ___ فطاير‬laa sawweet biitza

Don’t eat now!

e.

I didn’t make pizza or Fataye.

______ fatˤaajər

Exercise 25.3 Fill in the blanks with the proper negative polarity item. a. b. c. d.

‫ ___ _____ قريت بالمرة‬gareet bəlmarra I didn’t read it at all. I didn’t watch the movie ‫ ______ _____ ما شفت الفلم‬maa ʃəft əlfəlm

at all.

‫ ما ______ قابلتها مولية‬maa ____ gaabaltha I had never met her at all. ‫___ باكل من هالفالفل أب دًا‬

muulijja ______ baakəl mən I will never eat from this hal falaafəl ʔabadan falafel.

99

i.

‫_____ حلو فهالمحل‬ ‫_____ وافق يسافر‬ ‫_____ يقدر يقدم‬ ‫_____ ما بصدقه‬ ‫جد _____ متحف؟‬

j.

‫_____ أمها ما تصدقها‬

k.

‫______ ما ركبت طيارة‬

l.

‫من متى ما ______ فلم‬

25

e.

Negation

f. g. h.

___ ħəlu fhal maħal Nothing’s nice in this shop. ____ waafag jsaafər No one agreed to travel. ___ jəgdar jqaddəm Anyone can apply. ____ maa basˤadgah I will never believe him. ʧəd _______ mətħaf Have you ever been to museums? ________ ʔumha Even her mother does not maa tsˤaddəgha believe her. _______ maa rəkabt I have never taken a plane. tˤajjaara mən məta maa I have never watched a _________ fəlm movie for a long time.

Exercise 25.4 Translate the following sentences into English. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

100

‫رفض يرد على أي حد‬ ‫ما أبا أي شي‬ ‫ماشي خبز‬ ‫ما بسوي شي اليوم‬ ‫محد قالك اطلع‬ ‫مافي وال علبة‬ ‫مافي حد فالمطعم‬ ‫حسن يعرف انجليزي بس مب كوري‬

rəfaðˤ jrəd ʕala ʔaj ħad maa ʔaba ʔaj ʃaj maa ʃaj xəbz maa basawwi ʃaj əljoom maħħad gaallək ətˤlaʕ maa fi wala ʕəlba maa fi ħad fəl matˤʔam ħasan jəʕarf əngəliizi bas mub kuuri

UNIT 26 Noun Phrases

A noun phrase is a grammatical unit, which usually functions as a subject of the sentence or an object of a verb or preposition. It consists of a noun that defines the core meaning of the noun phrase, though it can also contain other modifying expressions. A noun phrase can be indefinite if it is newly introduced to the conversation, and definite if both the speaker and the hearer are clear about what it refers to.

Indefinite Noun Phrases In Emirati Arabic, a bare noun or noun phrase is interpreted as indefinite. It is also possible for the noun/noun phrase to be preceded by indefinite determiners such as ‘one’, ‘some’, etc.

‫واحد‬ ‫كم من‬ ‫أي‬ ‫وايد‬ ‫شويّة‬

waaħəd kammən ʔaj waajəd ʃwajjah

a (lit. one) some any many few

All the following are considered indefinite expressions:

‫بنت جميلة‬ ‫كم من غرض‬ ‫شويّة سيايير‬ ‫أي حرمة‬ ‫واحد عالم‬ ‫وايد كتب‬

bənt ʤamiila kammən ɣaraðˤ ʃwajjat səjaajiir ʔaj ħərma waaħəd ʕaaləm waajəd kətəb

a pretty girl some stuff few cars any woman a scientist many books

Definite Noun Phrases A noun/noun phrase is definite if it consists of a definite determiner such as the prefix əl- ‘the’ sometimes accompanied by a demonstrative like ‫ هذا‬haaða ‘this’. Notice that the demonstrative agrees with the head noun in gender (masculine or feminine) and number (singular or plural).

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-26

101

-‫اﻠ‬ ‫ها‬/‫هذا‬ ‫هاي‬/‫هذي‬ ‫ذاك‬/‫هاذاك‬ ‫ذيج‬/‫هاذيج‬ ‫هاييال‬/‫هاذيال‬ ‫هاييالك‬/‫هاذيالك‬

26 Noun Phrases

əlhaaða/haa haaði/haaj haaðaak/ðaak haaðiiʧ/ðiiʧ haaðeela/haajeela haaðeelaak/haajeelaak

the this (m) this (f) that (m) that (f) these those

Examples

‫ال ّش مس‬ ‫القمر‬ ‫هاذيج البنت‬ ‫هاذيال الكتب‬ ‫هاذيالك المطاعم‬ ‫هال ّس ياسة‬ ‫هذيالك الف راشات‬ ‫هاذيك اليحة‬ ‫هاييل الخضرة‬

əʃʃams əlgəmar haaðiiʧ əlbənt haaðeela əlkətəb haaðeelaak əlmatˤaaʕəm ha əssijaasa haaðeelak əlfaraaʃaat haaðiik əljəħħa haajeel əlxəðrah

the sun the moon that girl these books those restaurants this policy those butterflies that watermelon these vegetables

Noun Phrase Modifiers A noun may be accompanied by a range of modifiers in the formation of a noun phrase. A noun phrase modifier can be an adjective (e.g., tall student), a possessive (e.g., John’s mother), a relative clause (e.g., the girl who came yesterday), another noun (e.g., language course), or a participle (e.g., washing machine).

‫طالب مجتهد ذكي‬ ‫طالب وايد ذكي‬ ‫كتاب وايد حلو‬ ‫ الطالب األذكى‬/ ‫أذكى طالب‬ ‫من سكان العين‬ ‫مشوار مال دقيقتين‬ ‫شنطة وزنها عشرة كيلو‬ ‫شنطته الثقيلة‬ ‫أخت أحمد الجميلة‬ ‫القطوة اللي عيونها زرق‬ 102

‫محل هدايا‬ ‫مدرسة لغة‬ ‫رقاص‬/‫ولد يرقص‬ ‫زجاج مكسور‬

tˤaaləb mədʒtəhəd ðaki tˤaaləb waajəd ðaki ktaab waajəd ħəlu ʔaðka tˤaaləb/ətˤtˤaaləb əlʔaðka mən səkkaan əlʕeen məʃwaar maal dəgiigteen ʃantˤa wazənha ʕaʃra kiilu ʃantˤəta əθθəgiila ʔəxt ʔaħmad əldʒamiila əlgatˤwa əlli ʕjuunha zərg maħal hadaaja madrəsat luɣa walad jərgəsˤ/ raggaasˤ zədʒaadʒ maksuur

a hardworking clever student a very clever student a really good book the cleverest student an Al-Ain resident a two-minute drive a ten-kilogram suitcase his heavy bag Ahmed’s pretty sister the cat that has blue eyes gift shop language school dancing boy broken glass

It is also common to modify the head noun by a relative clause (see Unit 33) and a prepositional phrase (see Unit 21). Notice that the relative clause modifier is also marked by the relative clause marker ‫ اللي‬ʔəlli ‘that’.

‫الريال اللي ورا الطوفة‬ ‫القطو اللي فوق الطاولة‬ ‫الطريق للمسيد‬ ‫الكالس اللي بعد اإلجازة‬ ‫التلفزيون اللي ما له ك رتون‬ ‫البنت اللي تعرفها مريم‬ ‫الولد اللي فاز فالمباراة‬ ‫المدينة اللي اإلماراتيين يحبونها‬ ‫الوقت اللي روّح فيه علي‬ ‫السبب اللي استقال أحمد عشانه‬

ərrajjaal əlli wara ətˤtˤoofa əlgatˤu əlli foog ətˤtˤaawla ətˤtˤəriiʤ ləlməsiid əlklaas əlli baʕd ələʤaaza əttəlvəzjoon əlli maalah kartoon əlbənt əlli təʕarfha marjam əlwalad əlli faaz fləmbaaraa əlmadiinah əlli əlʔimaratijjiin jħəbbuunhaa əlwagt əlli rawwaħ fiih ʕəli əssəbab əlli əstaqaal ʔaħmad ʕaʃaanah

26 Noun Phrases

the man behind the wall the cat on the table the road to the mosque the class after the holiday the TV without a box the girl who Mariam knows the boy who won the match the city that the Emiratis love the time when Ali left the reason Ahmed resigned

Practice Glossary

‫كتب‬ ‫زار‬ ‫باع‬ ‫يعيش‬ ‫شغل‬ ‫مكان‬ ‫عين‬ ‫إيد‬ ‫ناس‬ ‫أسبوع‬ ‫أم‬ ‫قالص‬ ‫حفلة‬ ‫تاريخ‬ ‫كلب‬ ‫أرض‬ ‫حديقة‬ ‫كتاب‬

kətab zaar baaʕ jʕiiʃ ʃəɣəl məkaan ʕeen ʔiid naas ʔəsbuuʕ ʔəm glaasˤ ħafla taariix kalb ʔarðˤ ħadiiqah ktaab

wrote visited sold live work place eye hand people (pl) week mother glass party history dog floor garden book

‫مريم‬ ‫علي‬ ‫أحمد‬ ‫حكومة‬ ‫شركة‬ ‫مدير‬ ‫مشكلة‬ ‫صورة‬ ‫كوب‬ ‫طويل‬ ‫حلو‬ ‫سهل‬ ‫صعب‬ ‫صغير‬ ‫ عود‬/ ‫كبير‬ ‫زين‬ ‫يديد‬ ‫أول‬

marjam ʕəli ʔaħmad ħəkuuma ʃarika mudiir məʃkəla sˤuura koob tˤəwiil ħəlu sahl sˤaʕb sˤəɣiir kəbiir/ʕood zeen jədiid ʔawwal

Mariam Ali Ahmed government company manager problem picture cup tall beautiful easy difficult young big good new first

103

‫متحف‬ ‫غيمة‬ ‫امتحان‬ ‫تلفون‬ ‫سجادة‬ ‫بيت‬ ‫سيارة‬

26 Noun Phrases

mətħaf ɣeema əmtəħaan tələfoon səjjaadah beet sajjaara

museum cloud test phone carpet/mat house car

‫آخر‬ ‫طويل‬ ‫جديم‬ ‫صغير‬ ‫أبو‬ ‫مكان‬ ‫تلفزيون‬

ʔaaxər tˤəwiil ʤədiim sˤəɣiir ʔəbu məkaan tələvəzjoon

Exercise 26.1 Translate the following English noun phrases into Emirati Arabic. a. a young manager b. Ali’s work c. an old problem d. a small glass e. a beautiful picture f. this government g. that company h. these people i. those big hands j. those new places k. the man in the party l. the cup on the table m. the cat under the TV n. the place where I go o. the city where I live p. the girl who sold the car

Exercise 26.2 Translate the following Emirati Arabic noun phrases into English.

104

a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k.

‫أبو مريم‬ ‫مكان صغير‬ ‫مكان جديم‬ ‫العين الحلوة‬ ‫المشكلة السهلة‬ ‫أسبوع طويل‬ ‫أول مشكلة‬ ‫صورة كبيرة‬ ‫كم من العب‬ ‫هذا الكلب‬ ‫االمتحان مال التاريخ‬

ʔəbu marjam məkaan sˤəɣiir məkaan ʤədiim əlʕeen əlħəlwa əlməʃkəla əssahla əsbuuʕ tˤəwiil ʔawwal məʃkəla sˤuura kbiira kammən laaʕəb haða əlkalb ləmtəħaan maal əttaariix

last long old small father place TV

l. m. n. o. p. q.

‫هذيك الغيمة‬ ‫الفون اللي عاألرض‬ ‫القطو عالسجادة‬ ‫الحديقة ورا البيت‬ ‫الكتاب اللي كتبته‬ ‫المتحف اللي زرته‬

haðiik əlɣeema əlfoon əlli ʕal ʔarðˤ əlgatˤuu ʕassijjaadah əlħadiiqah wara əlbaeet ləktaab əlli kətabtah əlmətħaf əlli zərtah

26 Noun Phrases

105

UNIT 27 Construct States and Possessive Constructions

In Emirati Arabic, the common way to express possessive construction (cf. English ‘John’s house’) is by the construct state, i.e., combining two nouns together. The possessor (i.e., the owner) is always positioned after the possessed (i.e., the thing which is owned).

‫ كتاب أحمد‬kətaab ‫بيت لطيفه‬

Ahmed’s ʔaħmad book beet lətˤiifah Latifa’s house

‫ كوب شمه‬koob ‫بنطلون سالم‬ ‫كاب محمد‬

ʃammah bantˤeloon saaləm kab mħammad

Shamma’s cup Salem’s pants Mohammed’s cap

‫ نعال علي‬nʕaal ʕəli

Ali’s shoes

‫ قلم امي‬galam

Mom’s pen

‫اكل حمد‬ ‫سيارة فاطمه‬ ‫سيكل ساره‬

ʔummii ʔakel ħamad sajjaarat faatˤmah seekal sarah

Hamad’s food Fatima’s car Sarah’s bicycle

For construct states in which the possessive noun is not a personal name or ­kinship term, it has to be definite by adding the definite prefix ‫ ال‬al-:

‫ دواء المريض‬dəwa ‫مكتبة الجامعة‬ ‫حديقة الحيوانات‬ ‫لون الورد‬ ‫طعم التفاح‬

the patient’s medication the University’s library ħadiiqat animal’s əlħajwaanaat park loon əlward the flower’s color tˁaʕm the apple’s əttəffaaħ taste əlməriidˁ maktabat əldʒaamʕa

‫ كتاب الطّ الب‬ktaab 106

ətˤtˤaaləb

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-27

the student’s book

‫ نهاية الشهر‬nəhaajat ‫كتاب المحكمة‬ ‫عصير الب رتقال‬ ‫كتاب النحو‬ ‫غرفة المعلمة‬

the end əʃʃahar of month kətaab the əlmaħkəma court’s book ʕasˁiir orange əlbərtəqaal juice kətaab grammar ənnaħuw book ɣərfat the əlmʕalma teacher’s room

Possessive Pronoun

27

It is very common (especially in natural conversations) to express the possessive structure by the use of possessive pronouns (cf. English ‘my’, ‘his’). In Emirati Arabic, the possessive pronouns are suffixes to the possessed noun. The following are two examples of possessive nouns.

‫بيتي‬ ‫بيتك‬ ‫بيتج‬ ‫بيته‬ ‫بيتها‬ ‫بيتنا‬ ‫بيتكم‬ ‫بيتكن‬ ‫بيتهم‬ ‫بيتهن‬

beetii beetək beetətʃ beetah beetha beetna beetkum beetkən beethum beethən

my house your house your (f) house his house her house our house your (pl) house your (f. pl) house their (m. pl) house their (f. pl) house

‫قلمي‬ ‫قلمك‬ ‫قلمج‬ ‫قلمه‬ ‫قلمها‬ ‫قلمنا‬ ‫قلمكم‬ ‫قلمكن‬ ‫قلمهم‬ ‫قلمهن‬

galami galamk galamtʃ galamah galamha galamna galamkum galamkən galamhum galamhən

Construct States and Possessive Constructions

my pen your pen your (f) pen his pen her pen our pen your (pl) pen your (f. pl) pen their (m. pl) pen their (f. pl) pen

Notice that the silent feminine suffix [t] becomes audible before the possessive suffix (e.g., ‘car’).

‫سيارتي‬ ‫سيارتك‬ ‫سيارتج‬ ‫سيارته‬ ‫سيارتها‬ ‫سيارتنا‬ ‫سيارتكم‬ ‫سيارتكن‬ ‫سيارتهم‬ ‫سيارتهن‬

sajjaarti sajjaartək sajjaartətʃ sajjaartah sajjaaratha sajjaaratna sajjaaratkum sajjaaratkən sajjaarathum sajjaarathən

my car your car your (f) car his car her car our car your (pl) car your (f. pl) car their (m. pl) car their (f. pl) car

‫ساعتي‬ ‫ساعتك‬ ‫ساعتج‬ ‫ساعته‬ ‫ساعتها‬ ‫ساعتنا‬ ‫ساعتكم‬ ‫ساعتكن‬ ‫ساعتهم‬ ‫ساعتهن‬

saaʕti saaʕtək saaʕtətʃ saaʕtah saaʕatha saaʕatna saaʕatkum saaʕatkən saaʕathum saaʕathən

my watch your watch your (f) watch his watch her watch our watch your (pl) watch your (f. pl) watch their (m. pl) watch their (f. pl) watch

The construct state expression can be further modified by adjectives. Notice that adjectives always follow the entire construct state.

‫بيت أحمد اليديد‬ ‫فستان مريم اليديد‬ ‫سيارتي اليديده‬ ‫كمبيوتره الجديم‬ ‫حديقة محمد الجديمه‬ ‫مستشفى سالم اليديد‬ ‫دراجة سالم اليديده‬ ‫كتابه الجديم‬

beet ʔaħmad əljədiid fəstaan marjam əljədiid sajjaarti əljədiida kambjuutarah əldʒədiim ħadiiqat mħammad əldʒədiima mustaʃfaa saaləm əljədiid darraadʒat saaləm əljədiida kətaabah əldʒədiim

Ahmed’s new house Mariam’s new dress my new car his old computer Mohammed’s old garden Salem’s new hospital Salem’s new bicycle his old book

107

27 Construct States and Possessive Constructions

The Use of ‫ مال‬maal ‘of’ and ‫ حق‬ħagg ‘for’ in the Expression of Possession Another productive way to express possessive constructions is the use of linking particles ‫ مال‬maal ‘of’ and ‫ حق‬ħagg ‘for’. Note that the two particles can be suffixed by the possessive pronouns. ‫ مال‬maal

‫مالي‬ ‫مالك‬ ‫مالج‬ ‫ماله‬ ‫مالها‬

maali maalək maalətʃ maalah maalha

my your your (f) his her

‫مالنا‬ ‫مالكم‬ ‫مالكن‬ ‫مالهم‬ ‫مالهن‬

maalna maalkum maalkən maalhum maalhən

our your (pl) your (f. pl) their (m. pl) their (f. pl)

Examples

‫ السيارة اللي فالبيت مالتي‬əssajjaara əlli ‫الكتاب اصلن مالي‬ ‫مالي خاطر‬ ‫ال اط رّش االكل مالي بيت الجي ران‬ ‫هالقناع ماله‬ ‫ال تاخذين من مالها‬

fəlbeet maalti əlkətaab ʔasˁlan maali maali xaatˤər laa ətˤtˤarrəʃ əlʔakəl maali beet əljiiraan halqənaaʕ maalah laa taaxðiin mən maalha

The car that’s in the house is mine. The book is actually mine. I’m not in the mood. Don’t send my food to the neighbor’s house. It’s his mask. Don’t take from hers.

‫ حق‬ħagg ‫حقي‬ ‫حقك‬ ‫حقج‬ ‫حقه‬ ‫حقها‬

ħaggi ħaggək ħaggətʃ ħaggah ħaggha

for me for you (m) for you (f) for him for her

‫حقنا‬ ‫حقكم‬ ‫حقكن‬ ‫حقهم‬ ‫حقهن‬

ħaggna ħaggkum ħaggkən ħagghum ħagghən

for us for you (pl) for you (f. pl) for them (pl) for them (f. pl)

Examples

‫الكتاب مب حقك‬ ‫هالورد حق مريم‬ ‫خليت هاالكل حقكم‬ ‫راحت حق دكتور احمد‬ 108

‫عطوني اياه حقي‬

əlktaab mub ħaggək halward ħag marjam xalleet halʔakəl ħaggkum raaħat ħagg dəktoor ʔaħmad ʕatˁooni əjjaah ħaggi

The book is not yours. The flower is for Maryam. I left this food for you. She went to doctor Ahmed. They give it to me.

Practice

27

Glossary

‫شمس‬ ‫نجمة‬ ‫وقت‬ ‫دب‬ ‫اهل‬ ‫ك رتون‬ ‫يوم‬ ‫لعبة‬ ‫بيضة‬ ‫مدير‬ ‫بيت‬

ʃams nadʒmah wagt dəbb ʔahal kartoon joom ləʕbah bəədˤah mudiir beet

sun star time bear parents box day toy egg manager house

‫راس‬ ‫عيون‬ ‫جوتي‬ ‫طاولة‬ ‫بقرة‬ ‫حشيش‬ ‫حليب‬ ‫كورة‬ ‫ض ّو‬ ‫مكتب‬ ‫صقف‬

raas ʕjuun dʒuuti tˤaawlah bgarah ħəʃiiʃ ħəliib kuurah dˤaw maktab sˁaqf

head eye shoe table cow grass milk ball fire office ceiling

Construct States and Possessive Constructions

Exercise 27.1 Translate the following Emirati Arabic expressions into English by using the ­construct state. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.

‫حليب البقرة‬ ‫عيون الدب‬ ‫حشيش البيت‬ ‫جوتي احمد‬ ‫طاولة المكتب‬ ‫اهل البيت‬ ‫لعبة مريم‬ ‫بيض الدياي‬ ‫ك رتون المكتب‬ ‫مظلة فاطمة‬

ħəliib əlbəgarah ʕjuun əldəbb ħəʃiiʃ əlbeet dʒuutii ʔaħmad tˤaawlat əlmaktab ʔahal əlbeet ləʕbat marjam bəəðˤ əddəjaaj kartoon əlmaktab məˁðˁalˁlˁat faatˁma

Exercise 27.2 Translate the following English expressions into Emirati Arabic.

a. Ali’s brother b. the manager’s office c. the house ceiling d. Ahmed’s ball e. Mariam’s gold f. the neighbors’ dog

109

27 Construct States and Possessive Constructions

110



g. Salem’s coffee h. the doctor’s needle i. the exam paper j. the professor’s pen k. the student’s book

UNIT 28 Verb Phrases and Basic Sentence Structure

A verb phrase constitutes a major component of a sentence. It may only consist of a bare verb, or a verb with an object, and other modifiers such as adverbs and adverbial expressions. A verb phrase, when preceded by a subject, becomes a full sentence. In contrast to English, an Emirati Arabic sentence containing a verb phrase without an explicitly mentioned subject is grammatical, as long as the verb agreement indicates the gender and number of the subject.

‫جميل ضحك‬ ‫مايد راح‬ ‫مها رقدت‬ ‫رنا ابتسمت‬ ‫علي شرد‬ ‫حسن صرخ‬ ‫شما ص لَ ت‬

ʤamiil ðˤaħak maajəd raaħ maha rəgdat rana əbtasamat ʕəli ʃərad ħəsan sˤərax ʃamma sˤallat

Jameel laughed. Majid went. Maha slept. Rana smiled. Ali escaped. Hasan screamed. Shamma prayed.

The basic Emirati Arabic sentence structure is subject–verb–object (SVO), as shown in the following:

‫ حصة لعبت تنس‬ħəsˤsˤa ləʕbat tənəs ‫ مريم زارت برج خليفة‬marjam zaarat burʤ ‫األستاذ فر الكورة‬ ‫الياهل كل الكيك والبسكوت‬ ‫نايف بنى سور قوي‬ ‫سيف اشترى سيارة زرقا‬

Hessa played tennis. Mariam visited Burj xəliifa Khalifa. əlʔəstaað farr əlkuura The professor threw the ball. əljahəl kal əlkeek w The child ate the cake and əlbaskoot the biscuits. naajəf bəna suur gəwi Nayif built a strong wall. seef ʔəʃtara sajjaara zarga Saif bought a blue car.

The verb phrase can be further modified by adverbs and adverbial expressions. Adverbs always express the temporal (e.g., ‘now’, ‘tomorrow’), locative (e.g., ‘here’, ‘there’), manner (e.g., ‘happily’, ‘normally’), and frequency (e.g., ‘often’, ‘sometimes’) information (see Unit 20). Adverbial expressions are usually formed by prepositional phrases (see Unit 21).

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-28

111

‫ موزة كلت الكيكة أمس‬mooza kalat əlkeeka Moza ate a cake

28 Verb Phrases and Basic Sentence Structure

ʔams

yesterday. Saeed occasionally ʔaħjaanan eats meat. xawla naadəran maa Khawla rarely makes a təɣlatˤ mistake. noof rəkðˤat əbsərʕa Nouf ran quickly. əlʤumhuur ðˤaħak The audience laughed bsˤoot ʕaali loudly. mansˤuur jsuug Mansour drives əssajjaara bəntʔbaah carefully as always. kalʕaada

‫ سعيد ياكل لحم أحيانا‬sʕiid jaakəl laħam ‫خولة نادرا ما تغلط‬ ‫نوف ركضت بسرعة‬ ‫الجمهور ضحك بصوت عالي‬ .‫منصور يسوق السيارة بانتباه كالعادة‬

For verb phrases formed by ditransitive verbs (see Unit 17), the indirect object always precedes the direct object.

‫ أحمد طرش حق علي كتاب‬ʔaħmad tˤarraʃ ħag Ahmed sent Ali a ʕəli ktaab

book. Mera gave Hamda foonha her phone. əʃʃeex zaajʔd ʕallam Sheikh Zayed taught ʃaʕbah əttasaamuħ his people tolerance w əttaʕaawun and cooperation. ʤəwaahər ʕalləmat Jawaher taught her ʔəxətha waajəd sisters many skills. mahaaraat ləstaað saʔal xəliifa The teacher asked suʔaal sˤaʕb Khalifa a hard question.

‫ ميرة عطت حمدة فونها‬miira ʕatˤat ħamda ‫الشيخ زايد علم شعبه التسامح والتعاون‬ ‫جواهر علمت اختها وايد مهارات‬ ‫االستاذ سأل خليفة سؤال صعب‬

Copular Sentences Copular sentences, sometimes called verbless sentences in Emirati Arabic, are simple sentences that ascribe a property to the subject. In English, they are predominately expressed by the copula ‘be’, e.g., ‘John is a teacher’, ‘Mary is pretty’, etc. The copula is unexpressed in Emirati Arabic in present tense and is expressed by ‫ كان‬kaan ‘was’ in the past tense.

‫ خالد مهندس وايد محترم‬xaaləd muhandəs ‫خالد كان مهندس وايد محترم‬ ‫مكتوم طالب شاطر‬ 112

‫فاطمة بتكون مم ثَ لة ناجحة‬

waajəd muħtaram xaaləd kaan muhandəs waajəd moħtaram maktuum tˤaaləb ʃaatˤər fatˤma batkuun mumaθθəla naaʤħa

Khaled is a very respectful engineer. Khaled was a very respectful engineer. Maktoum is a smart student. Fatima will be a successful actress

Existential and Possessive Sentences

28

Emirati Arabic expresses existential (e.g., ‘there is a book’) and possessive (e.g., ‘John has a car’) by using the prepositions ‫ في‬fii ‘in’ and ‫ عند‬ʕənd ‘with’. Notice that these prepositions are affixed by the object pronouns in the expression of a possessive sentence.

Verb Phrases and Basic Sentence Structure

‫ الكبت فيه مالبس حلوة‬əlkabat fiih malaabəs The closet has beautiful clothes. ħəlwa

‫ الثالجة فيها أكل لذيذ‬əθθallaaʤa fiiha ʔakəl The fridge contains delicious laðiið

‫ البيت فيه ثالث غرف‬əlbeet fiih θalaaθ ɣəraf

food. The house has three rooms.

‫ أحمد عنده ثالث اخوان‬ʔaħmad ʕəndah θalaaθ Ahmed has three brothers. ʔəxwaan

Practice Glossary

‫طرش‬ ‫كسرت‬ ‫بنى‬ ‫ق رأ‬ ‫عطت‬ ‫يحترم‬ ‫طلب‬ ‫جهز‬ ‫سلف‬ ‫علم‬ ‫كتب‬ ‫طيار‬ ‫مصممة‬ ‫االمارات‬ ‫جامعه‬ ‫طالب‬ ‫كبير‬ ‫مجتهد‬

tˤarraʃ kəsart bəna gəra ʕatˤat jəħtərəm tˤalab ʤahhaz sallaf ʕallam kətab tˤajjaar mousˤamməma ələmaraat ʤaamʕa tˤaaləb kbiir məʤtəhəd

sent broke (I) built read gave respect ordered prepared lent taught wrote pilot designer UAE university student big hardworking

‫قطوه‬ ‫رف‬ ‫الكل‬ ‫تاريخ‬ ‫معلمة‬ ‫محامي‬ ‫ابونا‬ ‫االول‬ ‫قدوة‬ ‫اماراتي‬ ‫شاطر‬ ‫وايد‬ ‫مشهور‬ ‫صغير‬ ‫ذكي‬ ‫غنفه‬

gatˤwa raff əlkəl taariix mʕalma muħami ʔəbuuna əlʔawwal qudwa ʔəmaaraati ʃaatər waajəd maʃhuura sˤɣiir ðaki ɣanafa

cat shelf everyone history teacher lawyer our father first role model Emirati skilled many famous (f) small smart sofa

113

Exercise 28.1

28 Verb Phrases and Basic Sentence Structure

Translate the following Emirati Arabic sentences into English. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t.

‫محمد كان محامي شاطر‬ ‫الشيخ زايد كان أبونا األول‬ ‫الشيخ محمد بن زايد قدوة للكل‬ ‫هدى معلمة تاريخ‬ ‫نايف طيار مجتهد‬ ‫جويل مصممة مشهورة‬ ‫في قطوة على الغنفة‬ ‫في كتب على الرف‬ ‫دولة اإلمارات فيها سبع إمارات‬ ‫جامعتي فيها وايد طالب‬ ‫عيسى طرش كتاب لهند‬ ‫اختي كسرت الكوب‬ ‫سعيد طلب ورد حق ميثة‬ ‫نورة عطت خولة فلوسها‬ ‫عمر ق را حق رامي قصة‬ ‫رنا علمت أخوها الطبخ‬ ‫محمود جهز األكل‬ ‫إب راهيم سلف يوسف خمسين درهم‬ ‫علي بنى حق منى بيت كبير‬ ‫زايد كتب الواجب‬

mħammad kaan muħaami ʃaatər əʃʃeex zaajəd kaan ʔəbuuna əlʔawwal əʃʃeex mħammad bən zaajəd qudwat əlkəl huda mʕalmat əttaariix najəf tˤajjaar məʤtəhəd ʤuweel musˤamməma maʃhuura fii gatˤwa ʕalla əlɣanafa fii kətəb ʕala ərraff dawlat ələmaraat fiiha sabəʕ əmaaraat ʤaməʕti fiiha waajəd tˤullaab ʕiisa tˤarraʃ ktaab l hənd əxti kəsrat əlkoob səʕiid tˤəlab ward ħag meeθa nuura ʕatˤat xawla fluusha ʕumar gara ħag raami qəsˤsˤa rana ʕalləmat ʔəxuuha ətˤtˤabx maħmuud ʤahhaz əlʔakəl əbraahiim sallaf juusəf xamsiin dərham ʕəli bəna ħag muna beet kbiir zaajəd kətab əlwaaʤəb

Exercise 28.2 Translate the following English sentences into Emirati Arabic.

114

a. Khalifa took the decision. b. We traveled in the summer. c. Shamma bought a dress. d. Ahmed looked for you everywhere. e. His brother died while they were on a trip. f. The police are looking everywhere. g. My nephew wants to be a doctor. h. The package has just arrived. i. Hamad bought a new car. j. Hamda feels scared.

UNIT 29 Complex Verb Constructions

Complex verb constructions, occasionally called ‘serial verb constructions’ in ­formal grammar, are constructions in which two (or sometimes more than two) verbs are combined to express a single event. In most cases, the first verb serves to express the aspect of the event (i.e., whether it starts, finishes, or continues). In Emirati Arabic, a small number of verbs can serve this function. Notice that in many cases, the first verb of the complex verb constructions can start a sentence, followed by the sentence subject. Since the complex verb expresses a single action/event (instead of two or more events), the two verbs share the same subject agreement.

‫اروم‬ ‫خلص‬ ‫بدا‬ ‫كان‬ ‫قعد‬ ‫يلس‬ ‫راح‬

ʔaruum xalʕlʕasʕ bəda kaan gaʕad jəlas raaħ

‫راحت ريم تعرف منو سرق الكتب‬ ‫ما رمت اكمل الواجب‬ ‫راح راشد يقدم شكوى‬ ‫قعد أحمد طول اليوم ي زاعق‬ ‫كان ياكل على الطاولة‬. ‫يلست ألعب طول اليوم‬

I can finished started was sat (for progressive actions) sat (for progressive actions) went (for past actions) raaħat riim təʕrəf mnu sarag əlkətəb. maa rəmt ʔakamməl əlwadʒəb. raaħ raaʃəd jqaddəm ʃakwa. gaʕad ʔaħmad tˤuul əljoom jzaaʕəg kaan jaakəl ʕala ətˤtˤaawla jəlast ʔalʕab tˤuul əljoom

Reem went to find out who stole the books. I could not complete the assignment. Rashid went to file a complaint. Ahmed spent the whole day yelling. He was eating at the table. I spent the whole day playing.

115

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-29

29

Practice

Complex Verb Constructions

Glossary

‫ضرب‬ ‫نوى‬ ‫دفن‬ ‫هدد‬ ‫صلح‬ ‫أمس‬ ‫حرق‬

dˁərab nəwa dəfan haddad sˁallaħ ʔams ħərag

hit intended buried threaten fixed yesterday burned

‫لبس‬ ‫قص‬ ‫فكر‬ ‫ق را‬ ‫ضارب‬ ‫اخ‬ ‫جالبيه‬

ləbas gasˁsˁ fakkar gara dˁaarab ʔaxx dʒallaabijja

wore cut thought read fought brother dress

Exercise 29.1 Translate the following Emirati Arabic sentences into English. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

‫سارة كانت تلعب مع اخوها امس‬ ‫حسن يلس يصلح موتره المحروق‬ ‫محمد قعد يهدد الدكتور‬ ‫ليلى بدأت تضرب رامز‬ ‫ه زاع كان ناوي نية مب زينة‬ ‫أميمه راحت تسلم على اخوها‬ ‫لبست نور جالبية أمها‬ ‫راح راشد يقص شعره‬

saarah kaanat təlʕab wija əxuuha ʔams. ħasan jalas jsˁalləħ mootarah əlmaħruug. mħammad gaʕad jhaddəd əddəktoor. lajla bədat tədˁrəb raamez. hazzaaʕ kaan naawi nijjah mub zeenah. ʔumajmah raaħat tsalləm ʕala ʔuxuha. ləbsat nuur dʒallabijjat umha. raaħ raaʃəd jgəsˁsˁ ʃaʕrah.

Exercise 29.2 Translate the following English sentences into Emirati Arabic using complex verb constructions.

116

a. Ahmed is thinking about his future. b. Reem was going to wear a dress. c. Khalifa started to fight with Khaled. d. Saeed finished reading the book. e. Noor is cutting her hair.

UNIT 30 The Imperfective Aspect

Emirati Arabic, along with other dialects of Arabic, makes use of grammatical aspects to describe the timing of events. An action or an event can be complete, ongoing, or repetitive, which can be distinguished by using several words or morphemes depending on the language. The distinction between tense and aspect involves a complicated theoretical discussion and is not relevant for beginning learners of Emirati Arabic grammar. Readers may still use the terms ‘present tense’ and ‘past tense’ as the shorthand expression of ‘imperfective aspect’ and ‘perfective aspect’ (Unit 31) without any interpretive problems arising. In Emirati Arabic, the imperfective aspect roughly corresponds to English ‘present tense’. The imperfective aspect, used on the verb, can express a ‘generic’ statement (e.g., ‘The Sun rises in the east’) or an ongoing event (e.g., ‘Mariam is cooking (now)’). The word formation process for the imperfective aspect is to add a subject prefix and sometimes a suffix to the consonantal root depending on the sentence subject. Subject I You (m) You (f) You (pl. m) You (pl. f) He She We They (m) They (f)

Prefix

-‫أ‬ -‫تـ‬ -‫تـ‬ -‫تـ‬ -‫تـ‬ -‫يـ‬ -‫تـ‬ -‫نـ‬ -‫يـ‬ -‫يـ‬

ʔatətətətəjətənəjəjə-

Suffix

‫ين‬‫ون‬‫ن‬-

-iin -uun -n

‫ون‬‫ن‬-

-uun -n

The following examples demonstrate the complete paradigm of two verbs for your reference. Notice that the English translation of the imperfective aspect can be simple present (e.g., ‘I write’) or present continuous (e.g., ‘I am writing’), depending on the intended meaning.

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-30

117

‫كتب‬

30 The Imperfective Aspect

‫أكتب‬ ‫تكتب‬ ‫تكتبين‬ ‫تكتبون‬ ‫تكتبن‬ ‫يكتب‬ ‫تكتب‬ ‫نكتب‬ ‫يكتبون‬ ‫يكتبن‬ ‫درس‬ ‫أدرس‬ ‫ تدرسين‬،‫تدرس‬ ‫تدرسين‬ ‫تدرسون‬ ‫تدرسن‬ ‫يدرس‬ ‫تدرس‬ ‫ندرس‬ ‫يدرسون‬ ‫يدرسن‬

k-t-b ‘write’ ʔaktəb təktəb təktəbiin təktəbuun təktəbn jəktəb təktəb nəktəb jəktəbuun jəkətbn

I write/am writing. You write/are writing. You (f) write/are writing. You (pl. m) write/are writing. You (pl. f) write/are writing. He writes/is writing. She writes/is writing. We write/are writing. They (m) write/are writing. They (f) write/are writing.

d-r-s ‘study’ ʔadrəs tədrəs tədrəsiin tədrəsuun tədrəsən jədrəs tədrəs nədrəs jədrəsuun jədrəsən

I study/am studying. You study/are studying. You (f) study/are studying. You (pl. m) study/are studying. You (pl. f) study/are studying. He studies/is studying. She studies/is studying. We study/are studying. They (m) study/are studying. They (f) study/are studying.

Sometimes the root consonant may be erased in the formation of the paradigm. The root q-r-a ‘read’ is one such example. The following table shows that the rootfinal consonant alif is erased when it is further suffixed:

‫ق را‬ ‫أق را‬ ‫تق را‬ ‫تقرين‬ ‫تقرون‬ ‫تقرن‬ ‫يق را‬ ‫تق را‬ ‫نق را‬ ‫يقرون‬ ‫يقرن‬

118

q-r-a ‘read’ ʔagra təgra təgreen təgroon təgran jəgra təgra nəgra jəgroon jəgran

I read/am reading. You read/am reading. You (f) read/am reading. You (pl. m) read/am reading. You (pl. f) read/am reading. He reads/is reading. She reads/is reading. We read/are reading. They (m) read/am reading. They (f) read/am reading.

The following examples express either the generic meaning or the present tense meaning of the situation:

‫احمد يمشي كل يوم‬

ʔaħmad jəmʃi kəl joom

‫عبدالله ينام متأخر‬

ʕabdalla jnaam mtʔaxxər faatˤma tərkəðˁ fəlħadiiqa miira tədxal əlqaaʕa lətˤiifa tijləs ʕalkərsi əljədiid əθθaldʒ jθuub taħt əʃʃams

‫فاطمة تركض فالحديقة‬ ‫ميرة تدخل القاعة‬ ‫لطيفة تيلس عالكرسي اليديد‬ ‫الثلج يذوب تحت الشمس‬

Ahmed walks every day. Abdulla sleeps late.

30 The Imperfective Aspect

Fatima runs in the park. Meera enters the hall. Latifa sits on the new chair. Ice melts under the sun.

The imperfective aspect can also be used to express the so-called ‘future tense’ by adding the prefix - ‫ ﺑ‬b-:

‫عذبة ب تّ ابع فلم‬ ‫شمسة بتس وّي اكل‬ ‫شيخة بتشتري فستان‬ ‫األسبوع الياي‬ ‫مريم بتسافر اليوم فليل‬

ʕaθba bəttaabəʕ fələm ʃamsa bətsawwi ʔakəl ʃeexa bətəʃtrii fəstaan ləsbuuʕ əljaaj marjam bətsaafər əljoom fəlleel

Athba will watch a movie. Shamsa will make food. Shaikha will buy a dress next week. Mariam will travel tonight.

In the expression of a currently ongoing event, it is common for native speakers to add the word jaals/jaalsa or qaaʕed/gaaʕda ‘sitting masc./fem.’ before the imperfective verb:

‫ميثا يالسة تشتغل‬ ‫حصة يالسة تسوق‬ ‫محمد يالس ياكل‬ ‫أحمد قاعد يرقد‬

meeθa jaalsa təʃtəɣəl ħəsˁsˁa jaalsa tsuug mħammad jaaləs jaakəl ʔaħmad gaaʕəd jərgəd

Maitha is working (now). Hessa is driving (now). Mohammed is eating (now). Ahmad is sleeping (now)/he is about to sleep.

The imperfective aspect is commonly used to express the so-called infinitive clause (cf. English ‘John wished to come’). While infinitives do not really exist in Emirati Arabic, the imperfective aspect can fulfill this function:

‫أحمد يبا يروح‬ ‫علي يتمنى ايي‬ ‫مريم قررت‬ ‫تدرس‬

ʔaħmad jəba jrawwəħ ʕəli jətmanna ʔəjji marjam qarrərat tədrəs

Ahmad wants to leave. Ali wishes to come. Mariam decided to study.

119

30

Practice

The Imperfective Aspect

Glossary

120

‫غسل‬ ‫شرب‬ ‫اشترى‬ ‫باع‬ ‫فتح‬ ‫درس‬ ‫شرح‬ ‫اشتغل‬ ‫كتب‬ ‫ق را‬ ‫كل‬ ‫خذ‬ ‫انجليزي‬ ‫محل‬ ‫هاديا‬ ‫اخوان‬ ‫كرسي‬ ‫حديقة‬ ‫متأخر‬ ‫يدرس‬ ‫يحصلون‬ ‫يشتغل‬ ‫يتعب‬ ‫يسبحون‬

ɣəsal ʃərab əʃtəra baaʕ fətaħ dəras ʃəraħ əʃtaɣal kətab gəra kall xað ʔəngəliizi maħal hadaaja ʔəxwaan kərsi ħadiiqa mətʔaxxər jədrəs jħasˁsˁluun jəʃtəɣəl jətʕab jəsbəħuun

washed drank bought sold opened studied explained worked wrote read ate took english shop gifts siblings chair park late study (they) receive work get tired (they) swim

‫توفّ ر‬ ‫يح بّون‬ ‫تهتم‬ ‫يدرسون‬ ‫يحتفلون‬ ‫يطلع‬ ‫يذوب‬ ‫يصيح‬ ‫شغلهم‬ ‫عيالها‬ ‫خريجين‬ ‫تعبهم‬ ‫قوس قزح‬ ‫مطر‬ ‫ثلج‬ ‫شمس‬

twaffər jħəbbuun təhtam jədrəsuun jəħtafloon jtˤlaʕ jθuub jsˁiiħ ʃəɣəlhum ʕjaalha xərridʒiin taʕabhum qoos quzaħ mətˤar θaldʒ ʃams

(she) provides (they) love (she) cares (they) study (they) celebrate (he) exits/goes out (it) melts cry (their) work (her) children graduates hard work rainbow rain ice sun

‫سرق‬ ‫عطى‬ ‫مشى‬ ‫يلس‬ ‫رقد‬ ‫ركض‬ ‫دخل‬ ‫ثياب‬ ‫عصير‬ ‫كتب‬ ‫حفلة‬ ‫باب‬ ‫واجب‬ ‫قاعة‬ ‫قصص‬ ‫تفاح‬ ‫كل يوم‬ ‫يديد‬ ‫طالب‬ ‫امتحان‬ ‫ابو‬ ‫أهله‬ ‫مريض‬ ‫دواه‬

sərag ʕətˤaa məʃaa jəlas rəgad rəkaðˁ dəxal θjaab ʕasˁiir kətəb ħafla baab waadʒəb qaaʕa qəsˁasˁ təffaaħ kəl joom jədiid tˤaaləb ʔəmtəħaan ʔubu ʔahlah məriiðˁ duwaah

‫ امهات‬ʔummahaat ‫مكتبة‬ ‫كتب‬ ‫للي يقرون‬ ‫السمج‬ ‫البحر‬ ‫الرسامين‬ ‫ياهل‬ ‫عدل‬ ‫قبل‬ ‫بدون‬ ‫دوم‬ ‫عقب‬ ‫تحت‬ ‫يوع‬

maktəba kətəb əlli jəgroon əssəmatʃ əlbaħar ərrassaamiin jaahəl ʕadəl gabəl bəduun doom ʕəgəb taħat juuʕ

stole gave walked sit slept ran entered clothes juice books party door homework hall stories apple everyday new student exam father his family patient (his) medicine mothers library books readers fish sea artists baby well before without always after under hunger

Exercise 30.1

30

Based on the meaning of the following sentences, put the correct imperfective form.

The Imperfective Aspect

‫ نورة ______ ثيابها‬nuura ______ θjaabha

a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

‫نهيان ______ عصير‬ ‫هند ______ حق الحفلة‬ ‫ثاني ______ كتب‬ ‫ريم ______ الباب‬ ‫سيف ______ انقليزي‬ ‫حمدة ______ من المحل‬

h.

‫محمد ______ اخوانه هدايا‬

Noura washes her clothes. nhajjaan ______ ʕasˁiir Nhayan drinks juice. hənd ______ ħag əlħafla Hind buys for the party. θaani ______ kətəb Thani sells books. riim ______ əlbaab Reem opens the door. seef ______ ʔəngəliizi Saif studies English. ħamda ______ mən Hamda steals from the əlmaħal shop. mħammad ______ Mohammed gives his ʔəxwaanah hadaaja siblings gifts.

Exercise 30.2 Translate the following Emirati Arabic sentences into English. a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

‫اخوية دوم يجادلني‬ ‫الزجاج دوم ينكسر يوم يطيح‬ ‫الص رّاق دوم يصرق‬ ‫راعي التكسي دوم يسوق‬ ‫ربيعي دوم يدفع عني‬ ‫األم دوم تهتم بعيالها‬ ‫ابوية دوم يشجعني عالدراسة‬

ʔəxuuja doom jdʒaadəlni əzzədʒaadʒ doom jənkəsər əsˁsˁarraag doom jəsˁrəg raaʕi əttaksi doom jsuug rəbiiʕi doom jədfaʕ ʕanni əlʔum doom təhtam bəʕjaalha ʔəbuuja doom jʃadʒdʒəʕni ʕaddəraasa

Exercise 30.3 Translate the following English sentences into Emirati Arabic.

a. The student studies well before the exam. b. The father works for his family. c. The patient gets sick without his medicine. d. Mothers receive gifts on Mother’s Day. e. The library provides books for readers. f. The fish swim in the sea.

121

UNIT 31 The Perfective Aspect

The perfective aspect corresponds to past tense and past perfect in English. It is mainly used to indicate a complete event (which always happens in the past). The perfective aspect is always expressed by suffixing the perfective stem by a list of subject agreement. The following table shows that except for the pronoun ‘he’, ­perfective verbs with other persons must be suffixed with the corresponding ­agreement. In addition, the English translation is ambiguous between simple past (e.g., he wrote) and present perfect (e.g., he has written). Subject I You (m) You (f) You (pl. m) You (pl. f) He She We They (m) They (f)

Suffix

‫ت‬‫ت‬‫تي‬‫توا‬‫تن‬‫ت‬‫نا‬‫وا‬‫ن‬-

-t -t -ti -tu -tən -at -na -aw -n

The following examples illustrate two typical paradigms for the perfective aspect:

‫كتب‬ ‫كتبت‬ ‫كتبت‬ ‫كتبتي‬ ‫كتبتوا‬ ‫كتبتن‬ ‫كتب‬

k-t-b ‘write’ kətabt kətabt kətabti kətabtu kətabtən kətab

122

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-31

I wrote/have written. You wrote/have written. You (f) wrote/have written. You (pl. m) wrote/have written. You (pl. f) wrote/have written. He wrote/have written.

‫كتبت‬ ‫كتبنا‬ ‫كتبوا‬ ‫كتبن‬ ‫قال‬ ‫قلت‬ ‫قلت‬ ‫قلتي‬ ‫قلتوا‬ ‫قلتن‬ ‫قال‬ ‫قالت‬ ‫قلنا‬ ‫قالوا‬ ‫قالن‬

kətbat kətabna kətbaw kətban g-a-l ‘say’ gəlt gəlt gəlti gəltu gəltən gaal gaalat gəlna gaalaw gaalan

She wrote/have written. We wrote/have written. They wrote/have written. They (f) wrote/have written.

31 The Perfective Aspect

I said/have said. You said/have said. You (f) said/have said. You (pl. m) said/have said. You (pl. f) said/have said. He said/have said. She said/have said. We said/have said. They said/have said. They (f) said/have said.

In most cases, the perfective aspect is used to indicate any complete event:

‫ميثا اشترت كتاب‬ ‫أحمد باع بيته‬ ‫سيف درس امس‬

meeθa əʃtarat ktaab ʔaħmad baaʕ beetah seef dəras ʔams

Maitha bought a book. Ahmed sold his house. Saif studied yesterday.

This naturally includes the expression of ‘historic’ past events, such as:

‫ نيوتن اكتشف الجاذبية‬njuutən əktəʃaf əlʤaaðəbijja Newton discovered gravity. Another notion is the pluperfect, i.e., a complete event prior to another time in the past, or ‘past in the past’. In English, this can be expressed by the use of the past perfect:

‫ في حد يا هني قبل ال أوصل‬fii ħad ja hnii ‫مريم كانت تكتب قبل ال يصير عمرها خمس‬

‫يوم يت الشرطة الح رامي كان شرد‬

Someone had gabəl laa ʔawsˤal come here before I arrived. marjam kaanat Mariam had təktəb gabəl laa written before jsˤiir ʕəmərha she was 5. xams joom jat əʃʃərtˤa When the police əlħaraami kaan came, the thief ʃarad had escaped.

123

31

Practice

The Perfective Aspect

Glossary

‫اشترى‬ ‫باع‬ ‫كتب‬ ‫درس‬ ‫طلع‬ ‫طبخ‬ ‫ق را‬ ‫دق‬ ‫كل‬ ‫يا‬ ‫خبر‬ ‫سوا‬ ‫حس‬ ‫شرب‬ ‫كتابها‬ ‫بيته‬ ‫رواية‬ ‫صديقاتها‬ ‫امها‬ ‫معكرونة‬ ‫حفلة‬ ‫اهله‬ ‫شغله‬ ‫كيكة‬ ‫عصير‬ ‫كتب‬ ‫وايد‬ ‫دوخة‬ ‫امس‬ ‫اليوم‬ ‫بارد‬

124

ʃtəra baaʕ kətab dəras tˤəlaʕ tˤəbax gəraa dagg kall jaa xabbar sawwa ħass ʃərab ktaabha beetah rwaaja sˁadiiqaatha umha maʕkaroona ħafla ʔahlah ʃəɣlah keeka ʕasˁiir kətəb waajəd dooxa ʔams əljoom baarəd

bought sold wrote studied went out cooked read called ate came told made felt drank her book his house novel her friends her mother pasta party his family his job cake juice books lot dizziness yesterday today cold

‫جرب‬ ‫اشتغل‬ ‫نظف‬ ‫ياب‬ ‫ساعد‬ ‫حب‬ ‫صاح‬ ‫خذ‬ ‫كسر‬ ‫اكلة‬ ‫ف رنسا‬ ‫حج رتها‬ ‫أكل‬ ‫شغل‬ ‫امس‬ ‫ناقص‬ ‫اشياء‬ ‫تخصصه‬ ‫بروحه‬ ‫عيال‬ ‫أمريكا‬ ‫عشا‬ ‫جديم‬ ‫يديد‬ ‫ياهل‬ ‫ليت‬ ‫كرسي‬

dʒarrab ʃtəɣal naðˁðˁaf jaab saaʕad ħab sˁaaħ xað kassar ʔakla faransa ħədʒratha ʔakəl ʃəɣəl ʔams naagəsˁ ʔaʃjaaʔ taxasˁsˁəsˁah bruuħah ʕjaal ʔamriika ʕəʃa dʒədiim jədiid jaahəl leet kərsi

tried worked cleaned brought helped loved cried took broke dish France her room food task yesterday missing stuff his major alone children America dinner old new child light chair

Exercise 31.1

31

Based on the meaning of the following sentences, put the correct perfective form.

The Perfective Aspect

a. b.

‫ عاشة ______ حق امها‬ʕaaʃa ______ ħag umha Aysha called her ‫ عبدالله ______ معكرونة‬ʕabdalla ______ maʕkaroona

c.

‫ مها ______ الحفلة‬maha ______ əlħafla

d.

‫ سالم ______ اهله عن شغله اليديد‬saləm ______ ʔahlah

e.

‫ روضة ______ كيكة‬rooðˁa ______ keeka

f.

‫ عف را ______ بدوخة‬ʕafra ______ bdooxa

g. h.

ʕan ʃəɣlah əljədiid

‫ علي ______ عصير بارد‬ʕəli ______ ʕasˁiir baarəd

‫ مطر ______ وايد كتب‬mətˤar ______ waajəd kətəb

mother. Abdulla ate pasta. Maha came to the party. Salem told his family about his new job. Rawda made a cake. Afra felt dizzy (dizziness). Ali drank cold juice. Matar read a lot of books.

Exercise 31.2 Translate the following English sentences in Emirati Arabic. a. b. c. d. e. f.

The student loved his major. The child cried because he was alone. The father took his children to the US. The light worked yesterday. The mother made dinner for her children. The chair broke because it was old.

125

UNIT 32 The Grammatical Aspect

In addition to the use of perfective and imperfective aspects on the verb, some ­particular verbs, because of their meaning, can be used to assign a grammatical aspect to the entire event. For instance, the verbs ‘begin’ and ‘finish’ suggest that the event has just started and been completed, respectively (see also Unit 29). The same is observed in Emirati Arabic. Here is a list of aspectual verbs:

‫تم‬ ‫قاعد‬ ‫قام‬

tam gaaʕəd gaam

continued sit started

‫خلص‬ ‫بد‬ ‫كان‬

xallasˁ bəda kan

finished started used to (habit)

All these aspectual verbs can be followed by an imperfective verb:

‫سالم تم يطبخ لين فليل‬ ‫مريم قاعدة تتكلم مع‬ ‫صديقاتها‬ ‫عبدالله قام يتعلّ م عن‬ ‫الطبخ‬ ‫فاطمة وقفت تغسل‬ ‫المواعين‬ ‫مها بدت تاكل اكل‬ ‫صحي‬ ‫مريم كانت تق را وايد‬ ‫كتب‬

saaləm tam jətˤbax leen fəlleel marjam gaaʕda tətkallam maʕa sˁadiiqaatha ʕabdalla gaam jətʕallam ʕan ətˤtˤabx faatˤma waggəfat təɣsəl əlmuwaaʕiin maha bədat taakəl ʔakəl sˁəħħi marjam kaanat təgra waajəd kətəb

126

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-32

Salem continued to cook until night-time. Mariam is talking with her friends. Abdulla started to learn about cooking. Fatima stopped cleaning the dishes. Maha started to eat healthy food. Mariam used to read a lot of books.

Practice

32

Glossary

The Grammatical Aspect

‫طبخ‬ ‫قال‬ ‫نظف‬ ‫اشتغل‬ ‫ضحك‬ ‫كل‬ ‫سأل‬ ‫كلم‬ ‫خبر‬ ‫باع‬ ‫اتصل‬ ‫غسل‬ ‫شرب‬ ‫تعلّ م‬ ‫درّس‬ ‫حب‬ ‫درس‬ ‫رسم‬ ‫طلع‬ ‫شاف‬ ‫لين‬ ‫فليل‬ ‫سالفة‬ ‫حج رتها‬ ‫غداها‬ ‫استاذه‬ ‫صديقاتها‬ ‫ابوه‬ ‫يومه‬ ‫رحلة‬ ‫بدون‬ ‫اهلها‬ ‫يديد‬ ‫حجرة‬ ‫مواعين‬ ‫جامعة‬ ‫دوامه‬ ‫من وقت‬

tˤəbax gaal naðˁðˁaf əʃtəɣal ðˁəħak kal səʔal kallam xabbar baaʕ ʔttəsˁal ɣəsal ʃərab tʕallam darras ħab dəras rəsam tˤəlaʕ ʃaaf leen fəlleel saalfa ħədʒratha ɣədaaha əstaaðah sˁadiiqaatha ʔəbuuh joomah rəħla bəduun ʔahalha jədiid ħədʒra muwaʕiin dʒaamʕa dəwaamah mən wagt

cooked said cleaned worked laughed ate asked talked told sold called washed drank learned taught liked studied drew left (verb) watched/ saw until at night-time story her room her lunch his teacher her friends his dad his day trip without her family new bedroom dishes university his work early

‫ثيابها‬ ‫وايد‬ ‫ماي‬ ‫صحي‬ ‫اكل‬ ‫جامعة‬ ‫تلفزيون‬ ‫راح‬ ‫يه‬ ‫وقف‬ ‫غسل‬ ‫خلص‬ ‫كل‬ ‫سأل‬ ‫ق را‬ ‫نش‬ ‫لعب‬ ‫طبخ‬ ‫استلم‬ ‫مول‬ ‫امس‬ ‫يدتها‬ ‫عزيمة‬ ‫مدرسة‬ ‫متأخر‬ ‫جديم‬ ‫اغ راض‬ ‫امه‬ ‫بسرعة‬ ‫عن‬ ‫ربيعتها‬ ‫غالسها‬ ‫مطعم‬ ‫وايد‬ ‫كتب‬ ‫صبح‬ ‫شاطر‬ ‫كورة‬

θjaabha waajəd maaj sˁəħħi ʔakəl dʒaamʕa təlfəzjoon raaħ ja waggaf ɣassal xallasˁ kal səʔal gəra naʃ ləʕab tˤəbax ʔstəlam mool

her clothes more/a lot water healthy food university TV went came stopped washed finished eat asked read woke up played cooked received mall

ʔams jaddatha

yesterday her grandma

ʕəziima mədərsa mətʔaxxər dʒədiim ʔaɣraaðˁ ʔummah bsarʕa ʕan rəbiiʕatha glaasha matˤʕam waajəd kətəb sˁəbħ ʃaatˤər kuura

party school late old things his mother quickly about her friend her glass restaurant a lot books morning good soccer

127

‫طالبة‬ ‫بنت‬ ‫كاتبة‬

32 The Grammatical Aspect

‫موظف‬ ‫معاشه‬

‫جي رانه‬ ‫نفس‬ ‫بنت عمها‬

tˤaalba bənt kaatba

student girl writer

muwaðˁðˁaf maʕaaʃah

employee his salary

‫عشا‬

jiraanah nafs bənt ʕamha ʕəʃa

his neighbors same her cousin dinner

Exercise 32.1 Based on the meaning of the following sentences, put the correct grammatical form. a.

‫ميثا ______ تدرس‬

b. c. d.

‫سيف ______ يرسم‬ ‫ثاني ______ يطلع‬ ‫مها ______ تشوف‬ ‫تلفزيون‬ ‫فاطمة ______ تشرب‬ ‫ماي وايد‬ ‫محمد ______ يدرّس‬ ‫فالجامعة‬

e. f.

meeθa ______ tədrəs seef ______ jərsəm θaani ______ jətˤlaʕ maha ______ tʃuuf təlfəzjoon faatˤma ______ təʃrab maaj waajəd mħammad ______ jdarrəs fəldʒaamʕa

Maitha continued to study. Saif continued to draw. Thani is leaving. Maha is watching TV. Fatima started to drink more water. Mohammed started to teach at university.

Exercise 32.2 Match the following English sentences with the correct translations. a. b. c.

128

She used to go to school with her cousin. The writer used to read a lot of books. She finished cooking dinner.

1.

‫هو وقف يق را كتب‬

2.

‫هي خلصت تطبخ‬ ‫العشا‬ ‫الكاتبة كانت تق را وايد‬ ‫كتب‬

3.

d.

He stopped reading books.

4.

‫الموظف راح يستلم‬ ‫معاشه‬

e.

The girl stopped washing the dishes.

5.

‫هي كانت تروح‬ ‫المدرسة ويا بنت عمها‬

f.

The student came to ­university early.

6.

‫البنت وقفت تغسل‬ ‫المواعين‬

g.

The employee went to receive his salary.

7.

‫الطالبة يت الجامعة‬ ‫من وقت‬

hu waggaf jəgra kətəb hi xalləsˁat tətˤbax əlʕəʃa əlkaatba kaanat təgra waajəd kətəb əlmuwaðˁðˁaf raaħ jəstələm maʕaaʃah hi kaanat truuħ əlmədərsa wəjja bənt ʕamha əlbənt waggəfat təɣsəl əlmuwaaʕiin ətˤtˤaalba jat əldʒaamʕa mən wagt

UNIT 33 Relative Clauses and Complement Clauses

Relative clauses are clauses that modify the head noun or noun phrase. In Emirati Arabic, relative clauses are always marked with the relative clause marker ‫ اللي‬ʔəlli ‘that’ (see also Unit 26). Relative clauses can be restrictive (i.e., with a definite head noun) or nonrestrictive (i.e., with an indefinite head noun). Object relative clauses always contain a resumptive pronoun as the object of the verb, cf. English ‘the boy who I met (him)’. The following are some typical examples.

‫الشنطة اللي شفتها االسبوع‬ ‫اللي طاف حلوة‬ ‫الفون اللي استخدمته أمس‬ ‫جديم‬ ‫العلبة اللي حصلتها‬ ‫صغيرة‬

əʃʃantˤa ʔəlli ʃəftha ləsbuuʕ əlli tˤaaf ħəlwa əlfoon ʔəlli əstaxdamtah ʔams ʤədiim əlʕəlba ʔəlli ħasˤsˤaltha sˤəɣiira

The bag that I saw (it) last week is pretty. The phone that I used (it) yesterday is old. The box that I found (it) is small.

Relative clauses can also modify temporal and locative nouns. Notice that the resumptive pronoun is still used (e.g., after the preposition ‫ في‬fii ‘in’):

‫الشهر اللي انولدت فيه هو سبعة‬ ‫المدينة اللي أحبها هي دبي‬

əʃʃahr ʔəlli ənwəladt fiih huu sabʕa əlmadiina ʔəlli ʔaħəbha hii dbaj

The month that I was born in is July. The city that I love is Dubai.

Indefinite head nouns are less commonly relativized and found in natural conversations, and if it is the case, the relative clause marker ‫ اللي‬ʔəlli is not used.

‫أي مول كبير الزم يكون زحمة‬ ‫ماشي مكان كل حد يسيره‬ ‫يكون مب ممتع‬

ʔaj mool kbiir laazəm jkuun zaħma maa ʃaj məkaan kəl ħad jsiirah jkuun mub ħəlu

Any mall that is big must be crowded. There is no place everyone goes to that is not fun.

129

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-33

Complement Clauses

33 Relative Clauses and Complement Clauses

A full clause can also function as a complement of the verb, e.g., English ‘Ahmed thought that [Ali lied]’. A clause can also be a noun complement, e.g., the noun ‘rumor’ can be further elaborated by the clause ‘that Mariam will immigrate to the US’. In Emirati Arabic, complement clauses are marked by the complementizer ‫انه‬ ənna ‘that’ followed by a complete clause.

‫علي تحرى انه أحمد روح‬ ‫السبب انه سالم كنسل‬ ‫السفرة هو مرض عياله‬

ʕəli tħarra ənnah ʔaħmad rawwaħ əssəbab ənnah saaləm kansal əssafra huu maraðˤ ʕjaalah

Ali thought that Ahmed left. The reason Salem canceled the trip is his kids’ sickness.

Another type of complement clause is free relative clauses, cf. English ‘John ate what Mary cooked last year’. In this case, the relative clause marker ‫ اللي‬ʔəlli will be used:

‫بشرب اللي خذته الصبح‬ ‫ب رتب اللي خربته أمس‬

baʃrab ʔəlli xaðtah əsˤsˤəbħ barattəb ʔəlli xarrabtah ʔams

I will drink what I got in the morning. I will organize what I messed up yesterday.

Practice Glossary

‫يشتري‬ ‫يشم‬ ‫يروح‬ ‫يقول‬ ‫يوافق‬ ‫يفوز‬ ‫يصير‬ ّ ‫يح‬ ‫صل‬ ‫يسمع‬ ‫يلعب‬ ‫يخسر‬ ‫يروّح‬ ‫حادث مروري‬ ‫يدرس ب رّا‬ 130

jəʃtəri jʃəmm jrawwəħ jguul jwaafəg jfuuz jsˤiir jħasˤsˤəl jəsmaʕ jəlʕab jəxsar jrawwəħ ħaadəθ muruuri jədrəs barra

buy smell leave say agree win happen find hear play lose leave traffic accident study abroad

‫صعب‬ ‫جايزة‬ ‫سبب‬ ‫سرعة‬ ‫كريم‬ ‫وردة‬ ‫لذيذ‬ ‫سبب‬ ‫كل حد‬ ‫مفتاح‬ ‫ربيع‬ ‫مشغول‬ ‫طويل‬

sˤaʕb ʤaajza səbab sərʕa kreem warda laðiið səbab kəl ħad məftaaħ rəbiiʕ maʃɣuul tˤəwiil

hard prize reason speed cream flower tasty reason everyone key friend busy tall

Exercise 33.1

33

Translate the following Emirati Arabic sentences into English. a. b. c. d. e.

‫الكريم اللي اشتريته وايد زين‬ ‫الوردة اللي شميتها وايد حلوة‬ ‫أغلب اللي روّحوا مشغولين‬ ‫البنات اللي زارونا طوال‬ ‫أي سناك كل حد يشتريه الزم يكون لذيذ‬

f. g. h. i.

‫كل حد يحب انا ندرس ب را‬ ‫المفتاح اذا ضيعته صعب تحصله‬ ‫أنا اللي ربيعه فاز بجايزة‬ ‫السرعة سبب ليش الحوادث المرورية‬ ‫تصير‬ ‫السيارة اللي اشت راها فخمة‬

j.

ləkreem ʔəlli əʃtareetah waajəd zeen əlwarda ʔəlli ʃammeetha waajəd ħəlwa ʔaɣlab ʔəlli raawwəħaw maʃɣuliin əlbanaat ʔəlli zaroona tˤwaal ʔaj snaak kəl ħad jəʃtəriih laazəm jkuun laðiið kəl ħad jħəb ənnah nədrəs barra əlməftaaħ iða ðˤajjaʕtah sˤaʕb tħasˤlah ʔana ʔəlli rəbiiʕah faaz əbʤaajza əssrərʕa səbab leeʃ əlħawaadəθ əlmuruurijja tsˤiir əssajjaara ʔəlli əʃtaraaha faxma

Relative Clauses and Complement Clauses

Exercise 33.2 Translate the following English expressions into Emirati Arabic.

a. the man who I saw yesterday b. the girl who came yesterday c. the place I went (to) d. Mariam ate what Moza cooked. e. Moza lived where her mother lived. f. Ali thought that Salem was a good student.

131

UNIT 34 Questions

Yes-No Questions In Emirati Arabic, yes-no questions are expressed by uttering a statement with a rising intonation. There is no grammatical or morphological marker for yes-no questions:

‫حضرت الحفلة أمس؟‬

ħəðˤart əlħafla ʔams?

‫سارة بتسير المدرسة اليوم؟‬

saara batsiir əlmadrəsa əljoom? xallasˤt məʃaariiʕək?

‫خلصت مشاريعك؟‬ ‫أحمد كسر الفازة؟‬

ʔaħmad kəsar əlvaaza?

You attended the party yesterday? Will Sarah go to school today? Did you finish your assignments? Did Ahmad break the vase?

It is also possible to add a negative marker ‫ ال‬laa ‘no’ or ‫ صح‬sˤaħ ‘correct’ and ‫ مب جي‬mub ʧii ‘isn’t that so?’ at the end of the yes-no questions, similar to English tag questions:

‫سالم اشتغل فالويكند ال؟‬

‫راشد عطاج هدية صح؟‬

saaləm əʃtəɣal fəl wiikend, laa? mħammad sawwa keeka, laa? raaʃəd ʕatˤaaʧ hədəjja, sˤaħ?

‫ مب‬،‫فاطمة ترجمت المقال‬ ‫جي؟‬

faatˤma tarʤəmat əlmaqaal, mub ʧii?

‫محمد سوا كيكة ال؟‬

Salem worked on the weekend, no? Mohamed made a cake, no? Rashed gave you a gift, is that correct? Fatima translated the article, didn’t she?’

Wh-Questions

132

Questions are formed by question words (sometimes called ‘wh-words’ since most English question words start with ‘wh’), which are almost always placed at the beginning of the question. The rest of the wh-question is identical to a statement:

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-34

‫شو‬ ‫منو‬ ‫وين‬ ‫أي‬ ‫كم‬

ʃuu mnuu ween ʔajj kam/tʃam

‫شو تسوي هني؟‬ ‫منو قال هالكالم؟‬ ‫وين تبون تسافرون؟‬ ‫كيف بنسير دبي؟‬ ‫شقايل عرفت االجابة؟‬ ‫ليش سوت جي؟‬ ‫أي شنطة أختار؟‬ ‫كم تبا فلوس؟‬

what who where which how many/much

‫متى‬ ‫كيف‬ ‫شقايل‬ ‫ليش‬

ʃuu tsawwi hnii? mnuu gaal halkalaam? ween təboon tsaafruun? keef bansiir dbaj? ʃgaajəl ʕaraft ləʤaaba? leeʃ sawwat ʧii? ʔaj ʃantˤa ʔaxtaar? kam təba fluus?

məta keef ʃgaajəl leeʃ

when how how why

34 Questions

What are you doing here? Who said this? Where do you want to travel? How are we going to Dubai? How did you know the answer? Why did she do this? Which bag do I choose? How much money do you want?

It is also grammatical to ask a prepositional question:

‫بشو ييت المستشفى؟‬ ‫ويا منو سافرت فالصيف؟‬ ‫لين وين بتمشين؟‬

əbʃuu jeet əlməstaʃfa? wijja mnuu saafart fəsˤsˤeef? leen ween btəmʃiin?

With what did you come to the hospital? With whom did you travel in the summer? Up to where are you going to walk?

Emirati Arabic wh-questions can also be expressed by a relative clause (see Unit 33):

‫منو الشخص اللي التقيت فيه؟‬ ‫شو هو اللي كنت تباه؟‬

mnuu əʃʃaxsˤ əlli əltəgeet fiih? ʃuu huu ʔəlli kənt təbaah?

Who is the person you met? What is it that you wanted?

In very colloquial contexts, the wh-word can remain ‘in-situ’ (i.e., the original position). This is usually used in echo questions (cf. English ‘You met who?’).

‫ حمد توه خلص ق راية الكتاب؟‬:‫ أ‬ʔaħmad tawwah ‫ خلص شو؟؟‬:‫ب‬ ‫ اسمه سالم ال راشدي‬:‫أ‬ ‫ سالم شو؟ ال راشدي؟‬:‫ب‬

A: Hamad just finished xallasˤ graajat ləktaab? reading the book? xallasˤ ʃuu?? B: Finished what?? əsmah saaləm ərraaʃdi A: His name is Salem Alrashdi. saaləm ʃuu? ərraaʃdi? B: Salem what? Alrashdi?

133

Embedded Questions

34 Questions

Yes-no questions or wh-questions can be further embedded in a sentence (cf. ­English ‘John asked when Peter came’, ‘John wondered if he passed the examination’, etc.). For embedded yes-no questions, the embedded question markers ‫ اذا‬ʔiða and ‫ لو‬law ‘if’ can be used.

‫سارة سألت إذا ابوها بخير‬ ‫ريم تخبرت لوحد يبا مساعدة‬ ‫راشد يسأل وين بنكون‬ ‫االسبوع الياي‬

saara səʔlat ʔiða əbuuha bxeer riim txabbərat law ħad jəba musaaʕada raaʃəd jəsʔal ween bankuun ləsbuuʕ əljaaj

Sarah asked if her father is fine. Reem asked if someone needs help. Rashid asks where we are going to be next week.

Practice Glossary

‫يستقيل‬ ‫طبخ‬ ‫تسافر‬ ‫طاف‬ ‫جاوب‬ ‫تحضر‬ ‫تسأل‬ ‫وصل‬ ‫رد‬ ‫تكلم‬ ‫ايي‬ ‫س وّى‬ ‫ك ّس ر‬ ‫تسمع‬ ‫يتخبر‬ ‫يسوي‬

134

jəstəqiil tˤəbax tsaafər tˤaaf ʤaawab təħðˤar təsʔal wəsˤal rad ətkallam əjji sawwa kassar təsmaʕ jətxabbar jsawwi

resign cooked (you) travel passed answered (you) attend (you) ask arrived replied (you) talk come did broke (you) hear ask make

‫ناوي‬ ‫فاضي‬ ‫بعد‬ ‫ممل‬ ‫فازة‬ ‫صيف‬ ‫حل‬ ‫واجب‬ ‫سؤال‬ ‫شاي‬ ‫صحن‬ ‫الكالم‬ ‫عرس‬ ‫الحين‬

naawi faaðˤi baʕad muməl vaaza sˤeef ħal waaʤəb suʔaal tʃaaj sˤaħan əlkalaam ʕərs əlħiin

willing empty still boring vase summer solution homework question tea plate the talk wedding now

Exercise 34.1

34

Fill in the blanks by using the correct wh-word in Emirati Arabic. a. b. c.

Questions

‫ _____ _____راح يستقيل؟‬raaħ jəstəqiil? ‫ _____ _____ طبختيها؟‬tˤəbaxtiiha? ‫ _____ _____ بتسافرين فالصيف؟‬batsaafriin

d.

‫_____ناوي تكلمه؟‬

e.

‫_____ بيي أحمد؟‬

Who’s going to resign? How did you cook it? Where are you travelling fəssˤeef? in the summer? _____ naawi ətkalmah? Why are you planning to talk to him? _____ bajji ʔaħmad? When is Ahmad coming?

Exercise 34.2 Translate the following Emirati Arabic sentences into English. a. b. c. d. e. f.

‫ سارة حلت الواجب الويكند اللي طاف؟‬saara ħallat əlwaaʤəb əlwiikand əlli tˤaaf?

‫ منيرة جاوبت السؤال صح؟‬muniira ʤaawəbat əssuʔaal, sˤaħ? ‫ ريم ما س وّت الكيكة واال سوتها؟‬riim maa saawwat əlkeeka walla sawwatha?

‫ سالم ك ّس ر الصحن ال؟‬saaləm kassar əssˤaħan laa? ‫ عبالك هي بتسمع الكالم؟‬ʕabaalək hii batəsmaʕ əlkalaam? ‫ بتحضرين العرس صح؟‬batəħðˤəriin əlʕərs sˤaħ?

Exercise 34.3 Translate the following English sentences into Emirati Arabic.

a. Nouf is asking if you’re free now. b. Ahmad is asking why you aren’t here yet. c. Did I even ask you? d. Shall I make you some tea? e. What a boring movie! f. Where did Saeed go last weekend? g. How did she break the vase and why? h. Mohamed replied to you right?

135

UNIT 35 Subordination

Subordination is a process through which a clause of secondary importance (­subordinate clause) is linked to the main clause. In most cases, the function of subordinate clauses is to append background information of the main clause regarding its time, location, reason, cause, etc., based on the use of the subordinator.

‫يوم‬ ‫قبل‬ ‫عقب‬ ‫بعد‬ ‫لين‬ ‫وقت‬ ‫من‬ ‫مع انه‬

joom gabəl ʕəgəb baʕad leen wagt mən maʕ ənna

when before after after until during since although

‫دام‬ ‫أول‬ ‫اذا‬ ‫ألن‬ ‫عشان‬ ‫لو ما‬ ‫إنه‬ ‫إال إذا‬

daam ʔawwal ʔiða ləʔan ʕaʃaan law maa ənnah ʔəlla ʔiða

as long as as soon as if because in order to unless that (e.g., I think that …) unless

Like in English and many other languages, the subordinate clause can be placed before or after the main clause.

‫أحمد يا عقب ما رحت‬ ‫حصة ما رامت تي ألنها‬ ‫كانت تعبانة‬ ‫سالم لعب بعد ما خلص‬ ‫دراسة‬ ‫نورة نظفت حج رتها يوم‬ ‫قامت‬ ‫مع إنه قالوا إنهم مشاركين‬ ‫بروح معرض الكتاب‬ ‫بروحي إال لو تبين تيين‬ ‫بروح الجامعة عشان أسجل‬

ʔaħmad jaa ʕəgəb maa rəħt ħəsˁsˁa maa raamat tji laʔanha kaanat taʕbaana Saaləm ləʕab baʕad maa xallasˁ dəraasah nuura naððˁəfat ħədʒratha joom gaamat maʕ ənna gaalaw ənhum mʃaarkiin baruuħ maʕraðˤ əlkətaab bruuħi ʔəlla law təbeen tiin baruuħ əldʒaamʕa ʕaʃaan ʔasadʒdʒəl

136

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-35

Ahmed came after I left. Hessa couldn’t come because she was tired. Salem played after he finished studying. Noura cleaned her room when she woke up. although they said they are participating I will go to the book fair alone unless you want to join. I want to go to the university in order to register.

Practice

35 Subordination

Glossary

‫كل‬ ‫شرب‬ ‫راح‬ ‫ياب‬ ‫باع‬ ‫درس‬ ‫اشتغل‬ ‫سارت‬ ‫وصل‬ ‫غير‬ ‫ساعد‬ ‫فاز‬ ‫قدم‬ ‫خلص‬ ‫نظفت‬ ‫تسوق‬ ‫قامت‬ ‫يبيع‬ ‫بدا‬ ‫ساق‬ ‫نش‬

kal ʃərab raaħ jaab baaʕ dəras əʃtəɣal saarat wəsˁal ɣajjar saaʕad faaz qaddam xallasˁ naðˁðˁəfat tsuug gaamat jbiiʕ bədaa saag naʃ

ate drank went got sold studied worked went reached/arrived changed helped won applied finished cleaned (f) drives (f) woke up/stood (f) sells started drove woke up

‫ أسجل‬ʔasadʒdʒəl (I) register ‫ تبيين‬təbeen ‫ تيين‬tiin ‫ أبى‬ʔaba

you (f) want you (f) come (I) want

‫بدت‬ ‫يدرس‬ ‫يشتغل‬ ‫وصلت‬ ‫يبيع‬ ‫قالوا‬ ‫بروح‬ ‫تصالحو‬ ‫تضاربوا‬ ‫تغير‬ ‫ترقى‬ ‫شركة‬ ‫صحي‬ ‫جيم‬ ‫مل‬ ‫وظيفة‬ ‫دراسة‬ ‫جامعة‬ ‫بعده‬ ‫محاضرة‬ ‫دوام‬

bədat jədrəs jəʃtəɣl wəsˁlat jbiiʕ gaalaw baruuħ tsˤaaləħaw ədˤdˤaarəbaw ətɣajjar traqqa ʃarəkah sˁəħħi dʒəm mall waðˤiifa dəraasah dʒaamʕa baʕdah muħaadˤara dəwaam

‫ معرض‬maʕraðˤ ‫ الكتاب‬əlkətaab

started (f) study work arrived (f) sell (they) said (I) will go made up (pl) fought (pl) changed promoted company healthy gym bored job studying university still lecture working hours the book fair

Exercise 35.1 Fill in the correct subordinator based on the meaning of the sentence. a.

‫هند بدت تدرس ____ ما وصلت البيت‬

b.

‫علي توتر ____ بداية االمتحان‬

c.

‫محمد شرب شاي حار ____ كان بردان‬

hənd bədat tədrəs ‫ ــــــــــ‬maa wəsˁlat əlbeet Hind started studying as soon as she reached home. ʕəli twattar ‫ ــــــــــ‬bədaayat əlʔəmtəħan Ali got nervous since the start of the exam.

mħammad ʃərab tʃaaj ħaar ‫ ــــــــــ‬kaan bardaan Mohammed drank hot tea because he was cold.

137

d.

35 Subordination

e. f.

‫مريم بتفرح ____ فازت فالمباراة‬

marjam bətəfraħ ‫ ــــــــــ‬faazat fəlmbaarah Mariam will be happy if she wins the match.

‫راشد قرر يشتري بيت ____ أخذ قرض من البنك‬

raashəd qarrar jəʃtəri beet ‫ ــــــــــ‬jaaxəð qarðˤ mən ʔəlbank Rashed decided to buy a house when (he) took a loan from the bank.

‫حسن بيفرح ____ خذناه المالهي‬

ħasan bajəfraħ ‫ ــــــــــ‬xaðnaah əlmalaahii Hasan would be happy if we take (him) to fun city.

g.

‫حصة جددت اإلقامة ____ مدة طويلة‬

h.

‫شيخة بتروح الحج ____ حصلت م رافق‬

ħəsˤsˤah dʒaddədat əlʔəqaama ‫ ــــــــــ‬mudda tˤəwiilah Hessah renewed the residency after waiting too long.

ʃeexa bətruuħ əlʕəmrah ‫ ــــــــــ‬ħasˤsˤəlat muraafiq Shaikha would go to Pilgrimage if she finds a company.

Exercise 35.2 Translate the following Emirati Arabic sentences into English. a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

،‫فاطمة بدت تاكل اكل صحي‬ ‫عقب ما سارت الجم‬ ‫سيف يبيع كتبه اذا مل منهم‬ ‫خالد كان بعده يدرس قبل ال‬ ‫يشتغل‬ ‫روضة بدت تسوق يوم بدت دوام‬ ‫ قبل ما‬،‫حمد قدم على الوظيفة‬ ‫يسافر‬ ‫مريم وحمدة تصالحو عقب ما‬ ‫تضاربوا فالمحاضرة‬ ‫ماجد بدأ يتغير يوم ترقى فالشركة‬

faatˤma bədat taakəl ʔakəl sˁəħħi, ʕəgəb maa saarat əldʒəm seef jbiiʕ kətbah ʔiða mal mənhum xaaləd kaan baʕdah jədrəs gabəl laa jəʃtəɣəl rooðˁa bədat tsuug joom bədat dəwaam ħamad qaddam ʕala əlwaðˤiifa gabəl maa jsaafər mariam w ħamdah tsˤaaləħaw ʕəgəb maa ədˤdˤaarəbaw fəlmuħaadˤara maajed bəda jətɣajjar joom traqqa fiʃʃarikah

Exercise 35.3 Translate the following English sentences into Emirati Arabic. 138

a. Mariam woke up early in order to arrive on time. b. Shamsa will change schools if she doesn’t get high grades. c. Hamda helped her mom until night-time. d. Maitha went to Australia during the summer. e. You won’t pass if you don’t study. f. Moza was sad because her grandmother passed away. g. Ali studied in order to enter university. h. Although the car is old, it is still good.

UNIT 36 Coordination

Coordination is a grammatical process by which two identical grammatical units are combined. The coordinated units can be words, phrases, or sentences. They are always connected by a coordinator (cf. English ‘and’, ‘or’, etc.).

‫و‬ ‫وال‬ ‫أو‬ ‫لكن‬ ‫بعدين‬

wa wəlla/ walla ʔaw laakən baʕdeen

and or or but and then

‫مش‬ ‫ف‬ ‫مب‬ ‫ف‬

məʃ fa mob fa-

not so not and then

Examples ‫مريم تحب اللغات والعلوم‬ ‫أحمد يحب الرياضيات‬ ‫لكن يكره الفيزيا‬ ‫تحب تق را وال تشوف افالم ؟‬ ‫بنشوف الفلم بعدين بنروح‬ ‫نتسوق‬ ‫محمد يحب الرياضيات‬ ‫مش الفيزياء‬ ‫ما كان في وايد ك راسي‬ ‫فيلست على االرض‬ ‫أمي قالتلي يا تدرسين يا ما‬ ‫بتروحين الجامعة‬ ‫ال فاطمة و ال مريم يقدرون‬ ‫يتكلمون ف رنسي‬

marjam tħǝb ǝlluɣaat w ǝlʕǝluum ʔaħmad jħǝb ǝrijaaðˤijjaat laakǝn jǝkrah ǝlfiizja tħǝb tǝgra walla tʃuuf aflaam? banʃuuf ǝlfǝlm baʕdeen bǝnruuħ nǝtsawwag mħammad jħǝb ǝrrijaaðˤijjaat mǝʃ ǝlfiizjaa maa kaan fii waajǝd karaasi fajǝlast ʕala ǝlʔarðˤ ʔummi gaalatli jaa tǝdrǝsiin jaa maa bǝtruuħiin ǝlʤaamʕah laa faatˤmah walaa marjam jǝgdǝruun jǝtkallǝmoon faransii

Mariam likes languages and science. Ahmed likes math but hates physics. Do you like reading or watching movies? We will watch the movie and then go shopping. Mohmmed likes math not physics. There weren’t enough chairs, so I sat on the floor. My mom said either you study, or you will not go to college. Neither Fatima nor Marjam can speak French.

DOI: 10.4324/9781003320241-36

139

Correlative Coordinators

36 Coordination

There also exist correlative coordinators in which the two coordinated units are marked by their corresponding coordinator, like English ‘both … and …’ or ‘either … or …’ constructions.

‫يا … أو‬ ‫يا … يا‬ ‫ال … وال‬ ‫كلما … كلما‬ ‫مش بس … لكن بعد‬

Examples ‫يا تدرس وال بترسب‬ ‫فاالمتحان‬ ‫مريم ال طويلة وال قصيرة‬ ‫كل ما رقدت اكثر كل ما‬ ‫حسيت ب راحة اكثر‬ ‫مش بس تقدر تغني لكن‬ ‫بعد تقدر تعزف عالبيانو‬

jaa … ʔaw jaa … jaa laa … walaa kǝl maa … kǝl maa mǝʃ bas … laakǝn baʕad

jaa tǝdrǝs walla batǝrsab fi lǝmtǝħaan marjam laa tˤǝwiila wala gǝsˤiira kǝl maa rǝgadt ʔakθar kǝl maa ħasseet braaħa ʔakbar mǝʃ bas tǝgdar tɣanni laakǝn baʕad tǝgdar tǝʕzǝf ʕal bjaanu

either … or … either … or … neither … nor … the more … the more … not only … but also …

Either you study or you will fail the test. Mariam is neither tall nor short. The more you sleep, the more restful you feel. Not only can she sing, but also she can play piano.

Practice Glossary

‫يحبون‬ ‫رحت‬ ‫شفت‬ ‫سافرت‬ ‫بنتعشا‬ ‫بنروح‬ ‫تدرس‬ ‫ترسب‬ ‫أمتن‬ ‫دياي‬

140

jħǝbuun rǝħt ʃǝft saafǝrat bǝnǝtʕaʃʃaa bǝnruuħ tǝdrǝs tǝrsǝb ʔamtan dijaaj

(they) like (I) went (I) saw (she) traveled (we) will eat dinner (we) will go (you) study (you) fail fatter chicken

‫أحمر‬ ‫أبيض‬ ‫امتحان‬ ‫المدرسة‬ ‫قهوة‬ ‫شاي‬ ‫سمك‬ ‫امريكا‬ ‫ف رنسا‬ ‫حفلة‬

ʔaħmar ʔabjaðˤ ǝmtǝħaan ǝlmadrǝsa ghawa tʃaaj sǝmatʃ ʔamriika faransa ħafla

red white test school coffee tea fish America France party

Exercise 36.1

36

Fill in the blanks with the correct coordinator. a.

‫بندرس لالمتحان ____ بن رتاح‬

b.

‫تحب الكتب ____ االفالم ؟‬

c.

‫أحب أرسم ____ أكره ألون‬

d.

‫____ تعيد أكثر ____ تذكرت أكثر‬

e.

‫انا ____ أتكلم ف رنسي ____ إسباني‬

Coordination

bǝnǝdrǝs lǝlǝmtǝħaan ____ bǝnǝrtaaħ. tħǝb ǝlkǝtǝb ____ ǝlʔaflaam? ʔaħǝb ʔarsǝm ____ ʔakrah ǝlawwǝn _____ tʕiid ʔakθar _____ tðakart ʔakθar

We will study for the test and then rest. Do you prefer books or movies? I like drawing but I hate coloring. The more you repeat, the more you remember. ʔana _____ ʔatkallam I neither speak faransi _____ ʔǝsbaani French nor Spanish.

Exercise 36.2 Translate the following Emirati Arabic sentences into English. a. b. c. d. e.

‫ مريم سافرت ف رنسا و امريكا‬marjam saafǝrat faransa w ʔamriika ‫ بنروح المول و ال السينما ؟‬bǝnruuħ ǝlmuul walla ǝsseenǝma? ‫ فاطمة تبا اللبس االحمر مش االصفر‬faatˤmah tǝba ǝllǝbs ǝlʔaħmar meʃ ǝlʔasˤfar

‫ بنتعشا بعدين بنروح الحفلة‬bǝntʕaʃʃa baʕdeen bǝnruuħ ǝlħafla ‫ ال سارة وال خالد يحبون اللحم‬laa saara wala xaalǝd jħǝbbuun ǝllaħam

Exercise 36.3 Translate the following English sentences into Emirati Arabic.

a. Ali went to the party and met Ahmed. b. Do you prefer red or white? c. Ahmed and Khaled went to school. d. You can study or fail the test. e. I like coffee and tea. f. I like neither chicken nor fish. g. The more you eat, the fatter you get.

141

KEY TO EXERCISES

Exercise 2.1  1. a  2. d  3. b  4. a  5. d  6. a  7. c  8. a  9. a 10. b 12. c 11. d

Exercise 2.2 1. T   2. T 3. T   4. F 5. F   6. T 7. F   8. T 9. F 10. T

Exercise 2.3 1. b   2. a 3. a   4. a 5. d   6. a 7. c   8. a 10. a 9. b

Exercise 2.4 1. a 3. j 5. f

2. e 4. b 6. c

143

Key to Exercises

7. i   8. h 9. g 10. d

Exercise 2.5 1. i  2. d 3. h   4. f 5. e   6. c 7. b  8. g 10. a 9. j

Exercise 3.1 a.  ə/aa   b.  aa   c.  a   d.  oo   e.  ə/ə/aa/a   f.  oo   g.  ee

Exercise 3.2 1. aa  2. ii  3. ee  4. oo  5. uu

Exercise 3.3 1.  a   2.  o   3.  u   4.  ə   5.  i

Exercise 3.4 a. ee [geeðˤ] c. ə/a [rəkaðˤ] e. ə/ii [ɣəliiðˤ] g. ə/aa [məsmaar]

b. aa [saar] d. uu [bruuʃ] f. a [xað] h. ee [beet]

Exercise 4.2 a. ‫  بار‬b. ‫  شباب‬c. ‫  حاب‬d. ‫  رشاش‬e. ‫  ضباب‬f. ‫  عقل‬g. ‫رغد‬

144

Exercise 4.3

Key to Exercises

The individual letters are written following the right-to-left direction. a. ‫ ع‬ b. ‫ ل‬ c. d. e. f. ‫ ر‬ g. ‫ م‬ h.

‫ ب‬ ‫ ا‬ ‫ ق‬ ‫ ب‬ ‫ س‬ ‫ د‬ ‫ ل‬ ‫ ن‬

‫ ا‬ ‫ ل‬ ‫ ب‬ ‫ س‬ ‫ م‬ ‫ ن‬ ‫ م‬ ‫ ص‬

‫ر‬ ‫ط‬ ‫ع‬ ‫ك‬ ‫ر‬ ‫ب‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ح‬

Exercise 5.1 a. boot c. makeup e. bank g. password i. supermarket k. parking m. Facebook

b. charge d. buffet f. ice cream h. stamp j. villa l. computer

Exercise 6.1 a. ‫ طبيبه‬ b. ‫ مهندسه‬ c. ‫ موظفة‬ d. ‫ طباخة‬ e. ‫ ممثله‬ f. ‫ ممرضة‬ g. ‫ معلمة‬ h. ‫ قصيرة‬

tˤabiiba muhandəsa muwadˤdˤafa tˤabbaaxa mumaθθəla mumarrədˤa məʕallma gəsˁiira

Exercise 6.2 a. M d. M g. M

b. F e. M h. F

c. F f. F i. M 145

Key to Exercises

Exercise 6.3 a. ‫ س وّاقين‬sawwagiin sammaaʕaat b. ‫ سماعات‬ mubtadəʔaat c. ‫ مبتدئات‬ muħasəbiin d. ‫ محاسبين‬ taadʒəraat e. ‫ تاج رات‬

Exercise 6.4 mutardʒəmteen a. ‫ مترجمتين‬ b. ‫ زميلتين‬zamiilteen mustaʃaareen c. ‫ مستشارين‬ d. ‫ سايحين‬saajiheen e. ‫ سيارتين‬sajjaarteen

Exercise 6.5 a. ‫ الصرصور‬ b. ‫ الستارة‬ ‫ اللوحة‬ c. ‫ النجم‬ d. ‫ الدرس‬ e.

əsˤsˤarsˤuur əssətaara əllooħa ənnadʒəm əddars

Exercise 6.6 a. M   b. S   c. S   d. M   e. M

Exercise 6.7 1. b    2. b   3. c

Exercise 6.8

146

a. M b. F c. M d. M e. F

‫ طباخين‬ ‫ سماعات‬ ‫ كذابين‬ ‫ مهندسين‬ ‫ والعات‬

tˤabbaaxiin sammaʕaat tʃaððaabiin məhandesiin wallaaʕaat

Exercise 6.9

Key to Exercises

a. M   b.  F   c. F   d. F   e.  F

Exercise 7.1 ‫أنا‬ ‫إنت‬ ‫إنتي‬ ‫هو‬ ‫هي‬ ‫نحن‬ ‫إنتوا‬ ‫إنتن‬ ‫هم‬ ‫هن‬

ʔana ʔənta ʔənti huu hii nəħən ʔəntu ʔəntən hum hən

meaning I you you he she we you you they they

number singular singular singular singular singular plural plural plural plural plural

gender m/f masculine feminine masculine feminine m/f masculine feminine masculine feminine

Exercise 7.2 ‫هذا‬ ‫هاي\هاذي‬ ‫هذيل‬ ‫هذاك‬ ‫هاذيج‬ ‫هذيالك‬

haaða haaj/haðii haaðeel haaðaak haaðiiʧ haaðeelaak

meaning this this these that that those

number singular singular plural singular singular plural

gender masculine feminine m/f masculine feminine m/f

close to speaker? yes yes yes no no no

Exercise 7.3 a. ‫ هذا القلم‬ ‫ هذاك البحر‬ b. ‫ هاذيال األشهر‬ c. d. ‫ هذيالك األنهار‬ e. ‫هذي الدريشة‬/‫ هاي‬ ‫ هاذيج المعلمة‬ f. ‫ هاذيال الدول‬ g. h. ‫ هذيالك الشجر‬

haaða ǝlgalam haðaak ǝlbaħar haaðeela ǝlʔaʃhur haðeelak ǝlʔanhaar haðii ǝddǝriiʃah haaðiiʧ ǝlmʕalmah haaðeel(a) ǝddəwal haaðeelaak ǝʃʃijar

147

Key to Exercises

Exercise 7.4 a. those girls c. that man e. this notebook g. that car i. these palm trees

b. d. f. h. j.

that woman these dresses (cultural dress) this slipper this passport that pilot

Exercise 8.1 a. Mariam read the novel. b. Ali watched the movie. c. Moza bought the book. d. Sheikha sold the computer. e. Mohammed cleaned the room. f. Salem broke the glass. g. Noora held the baby. h. Khalifa heard/listened to the song.

Exercise 8.2 a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h

‫عافوا المطعم‬ ‫ميثة زقرت البشكارة‬ ‫أخوي حش رني‬ ‫حبيت القطوة‬ ‫ مزرت) الفنيان‬/‫)ترست‬ ‫البعير رفس راعيه‬ ‫هو عفد من سور المدرسة‬ ‫أمي هزبت البشكارة‬

ʕaafaw əlmatˤʕam meeθa zəgarat əlbəʃkaara Ɂuxuuj ħəʃarni ħabbeet əlgatˤwa (təras-t/məzar-t) əlfənjaan əlbǝʕiir rəfas raaʕiih huu ʕəfad mǝn suur əlmədrəsa Ɂummi həzbat əlbəʃkaara

Exercise 9.1

148

a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.

ّ ‫ق‬ ‫صر‬ ‫طلّ ع‬ ‫خ رّب‬ ‫نظّ ف‬ ‫نّ زل‬ ‫ن يّم‬ ‫ك ّس ر‬ ‫ف نّ ش‬ ‫ع وّر‬ ‫ي دِّد‬

gasˤsˤar tˤallaʕ xarrab naðˤðˤaf nazzal najjam kassar fannaʃ ʕawwaar jaddad

made s.o. short made s.o. (go) out ruined cleaned made s.o. down made s.o. sleep made s.o or s.th. broken ended his service made s.o. painful made s.o. new

Exercise 9.2

Key to Exercises

a. Ahmed made Fatma sad. b. Ali ruined the car. c. Suroor dirtied the living room. d. Omar renewed the car. e. Khaled camped in the desert. f. Hassan finished the homework.

Exercise 9.3 a. b. c. d. e. f.

‫احمد ز ّع ل فاطمة‬ ‫خالد وقّ ف السيارة‬ ‫حسن نظّ ف الصالة‬ ‫حامد طلّ ع الولد‬ ‫عمر ن ّش ف الصحون‬ ‫علي ش ّغ ل السخان‬

ʔaħmad zaʕʕal faatʕma xaaləd waggaf əssəjjaara ħasan nəðˤðˤaf əsʕsʕaalʕah ħaamed tˤallaʕ əlwəlad ʕumar naʃʃaf əsˤsˤəħuun ʕəli ʃaɣɣalˤ əssaxaan

Exercise 10.1 a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

‫عاقب‬ ‫عالج‬ ‫زاحم‬ ‫وافق‬ ‫عاند‬ ‫شارك‬ ‫ذاكر‬

ʕaaqab ʕaalaʤ zaaħam waafaq ʕaanad ʃaarak ðaakar

punished (s.o) treated (s.o.) jostled (s.o.) agreed (on s.o.) insisted (about s.o.) shared (in s.th.) studied (s.o.)

Exercise 10.2 a. The teacher agreed on the trip. b. The doctor treated the patient. c. Hamda participated in the race. d. The manager helped the employees. e. Hamad jostled the sellers. f. Rashid studied his lessons.

149

Key to Exercises

Exercise 10.3 a. b. c. d. e. f.

‫زايد سافر للمؤتمر‬ ‫مديرة المدرسة وافقت على الرحلة‬ ‫نورة طالعت الفلم‬ ‫حصة ساعدت أبوها‬ ‫علي العب اليهال‬ ‫حسن قابل المسؤول‬

zajəd saafar ləlmuʔtamar mudiirat əlmadrəsah waafəqat ʕala ərrəħlah nuurah tˤaaləʕat əlfəlm ħəsˤsˤah saaʕədat ʔəbuuha ʕəli laaʕab əljahhaal ħəsan gaabal əlmasʔuul

Exercise 11.1 1. b   2. a   3. b   4.  a

Exercise 11.2 a. Maha has changed after the university. b. Ahmed was suspended from work. c. Hessah talked in the lecture. d. Aisha remembered the password. e. Hammad challenged the disability. f. Khaled volunteered with the education ministry. g. Rashid received the keys.

Exercise 11.3 a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

‫أخوي تسلم الشهادة‬ ‫حصة تلبست‬ ‫حمد تذكر الكلمة‬ ‫مريم توصخت شنطتها‬ ‫القطوة تكهربت أمس‬ ‫حسن تحمس للمسابقة‬ ‫خالد تحسن في المدرسة‬

ʕuxuuj tsallam əʃʃahaadah ħəsˤsˤah təlabbəsat ħamad tðakkar əlkəlmah marjam twasˤsˤəxat ʃantˤatha əlgatˤwah tkahrəbat ʔams ħasan tħammas ləlmusaabaqah xaləd tħassan fəlmadrəsah

Exercise 12.1

150

a. b. c. d. e. f.

‫تضارب‬ ‫توافق‬ ‫تساعد‬ ‫ت زامط‬ ‫ت رابع‬ ‫تشارك‬

tðˤaarab twaafag tsaaʕad tzaamatˤ traabaʕ tʃaarak

fought with each other. agreed with e.o. helped with e.o. challenged e.o. befriended with e.o. shared with e.o.

g. h. i. j. k. l.

‫ت زاعل‬ ‫ت زاعج‬ ‫تغازل‬ ‫تواجع‬ ‫تخالط‬ ‫تسافر‬

tzaaʕal tzaaʕadʒ tɣaazal twaadʒaʕ txaalatˤ tsaafar

upset e.o. talked loudly with e.o. flirted with e.o. scolded e.o. mixed with e.o. traveled with e.o.

Key to Exercises

Exercise 12.2 a. The friends sprayed water on each other. b. The boys have damage from the run. c. The girl goes with her friend. d. The girl does not listen to her mom.

Exercise 12.3 a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.

‫تضاربنا ويا شمسة‬ ‫مريم تساعد اليازية‬ ‫الدكتورة تعالج هند‬ ‫امي تهازب شما‬ ‫الولد ت زاعل ويا ربيعه‬ ‫يلست ت رابع ورا ولدها‬ ‫يدتيه يالسه تغازل يدي‬ ‫تمت تجابل العيال‬ ‫دوم تسافر في الصيف‬ ‫الدكتورة ت راحع لالمتحان‬

tdˤaarbna wijaa ʃamsa marjam tsaaʕəd əljaazja əddəktoorah tʕaalədʒ hənd ʔummi thaazəb ʃammaa əlwalad tzaaʕal wijaa rəbjʕah jəlsat traabəʕ wara waladha jaddəti jaalsah tɣaazəl jaddi tammat tdʒaabəl əlʕjaal doom tsaafər f əlsˤeef əldəktoora traadʒəʕ lələmtəħaan

Exercise 13.1 a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k.

‫انكتب‬ ‫انطبخ‬ ‫انذبح‬ ‫انعجب‬ ‫انخبص‬ ‫انخطف‬ ‫انهزب‬ ‫انخلع‬ ‫انصب‬ ‫انقسم‬ ‫انقفل‬

ənketab əntˤəbax ənðəbaħ ənʕeʤəb ənxebasˤ ənxetˤaf ənhezab ənxelaʕ ənsˤabb ənqesam əngəfal 151

Key to Exercises

Exercise 13.2 a.  Ahmed was stung by the bees. b.  He lay on his stomach. c.  The food was cooked. d.  The boy liked the girl. e.  The goat was killed for Eid.  f.  The cat was kidnapped. g.  The teacher got scolded. h.  The papers got mixed. i.  Her shoulder got dislocated. j.  The door got locked. k.  The flask got spilled.

Exercise 13.3 a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

‫انصبت القهوة على الزولية‬ ‫جتفها اليسار انخلع‬ ‫انقسم األكل بينهم‬ ‫انخطف الياهل‬ ‫انقفلت الغرفة‬ ‫انصب العصير‬ ‫انخبصت األوراق‬ ‫انهزبت البنت من أمها‬

ənsˤabbat əlgahwa ʕala əzuulijja dʒatəfhaa əljəsaar ʔənxəlaʕ ənəsm əlʔaakəl beenhum ənxətˤaf ʔljaahəl əngaflat əlɣərfa ənsˤab əlʕasˤiir ənxabsˤat əlʔaawraag nhəzbat əlbənt mən ʔumha

Exercise 14.1 a. b. c. d. e.

‫الجو استوى مغيم‬ ‫عمر ارتبش بعد ما سمع األخبار‬ ‫البيت انترس ماي بسبت المطر‬ ‫حمدان اشترى غدا بعد المدرسة‬ ‫علي افتكر انه القميص احترق‬

əldʒaw əstəwaa mɣajjəm ʕumar ərtəbaʃ baʕad maa səmaʕ əlʔaxbaar əlbeet əntəras maaj bsəbbat əlmətˤar ħamdaan əʃtəra ɣədaa baʕad əlmadrəsah ʕali əftəkar ʔənna əlgəmiisˤ əħtərag

Exercise 14.2 a. The house got filled with people. b. Ali received the T-shirt. c. Mohammad visited the Grand Mosque in Mecca after Eid. d. Sara’s laptop got ruined after their house got burned. e. Naser shivered from the cold.

152

Exercise 15.1 a. b. c. d. e.

‫ابيض الولد‬ ‫انير القطو‬ ‫افتر الشيبة‬ ‫خربت السيارة‬ ‫فجر المبنى‬

Key to Exercises

ʔəbjaðˤðˤ əlwəlad njarr əlgatˤuw ʔəftarr əlʃʃeeba xarrabt əlsajjaarah fadʒdʒar əlmabna

Exercise 15.2 a. b. c. d. e.

Mohammed’s face became red. Rashid became bad. Mohammed got soaked by water. Saeed got taken off from his place. Mohammed got taller when he ate eggs.

Exercise 16.1 a. b. c. d. e.

‫محمد استفتح محله اليديد‬ ‫األبو سأل عن أوالده‬ ‫البنية استانست في الرحلة‬ ‫اليد استذكر حياته الجديمة‬ ‫موزة أخذت مكان ربيعتها في الدوام‬

mħammad əstaftaħ maħallah ljədiid əlɁəbu seɁal ʕan Ɂawlaadah ləbnajjah əstaanəsat fi Ɂərrəħlah əljadd əstaðkar ħayaatah ilʒədiimah moozah xaðat məkaan rəbiiʕatha fi əddəwaam

Exercise 16.2 a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.

Rashid called the police for help. The girl goofed on her brother. The man acted all virtuous on us. My father’s wife (i.e., stepmother) took my mother’s place. The boy got possessed when he was with us. My baby brother was disturbing my mother. My friend provoked the driver. My father rushed my sister up. The soldier gave up on the war. Ali appealed the verdict.

153

Key to Exercises

Exercise 17.1 a. D  b. T  c. T  d. I  e. D  f. I  g. T  h. D  i. I  j. T

Exercise 17.2 a. Abdullah lent Muhammed money. b. Mariam informed Rashid of the news. c. Hassan fed the cat meat. d. Nasser taught Sultan the curriculum. e. Salma teaches Ahmed English.

Exercise 17.3 a. b. c. d. e.

‫علي ط ّع م الياهل األكل‬ ‫حسن عطى علي االمتحان‬ ‫الشركة طرشت لعلي دوا‬ ‫المعلم سأل الطالب سؤال‬ ‫موزة سلمت الجامعة المستند‬

ʕəli tˤtˤaʕʕam əljaahəl əlʔakəl ħassan ʕatˤaa ʕəli əlʔmtiħaan əʔʃʃərkah tˤarrəʃat lʕəli ədduwaa lmʕalləm saʔal ətˤtˤaaləb suʔaal mooza salləmat əldʒaamʕah əlmustanad

Exercise 18.1 a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.

‫ريوق‬ ‫تدريب‬ ‫تحليه‬ ‫سؤال‬ ‫لعب‬ ‫كالم‬ ‫سالم‬ ‫صاله‬ ‫نزيف‬

rjuug tədriib taħlia suʔaal ləʕb kalaam salaam sˤalaah naziif

breakfast training dessert question play (noun) speech peace praying bleeding

Exercise 18.2 1. b  2. a  3. c  4. a  5.  b  6.  c  7.  d

154

Exercise 18.3

Key to Exercises

a. The project will take time to be prepared. b. The girls’ hostel is more beautiful than the boys’. c. Environmental protection is one of our society’s priorities. d. The surprise was evident on the faces of the audience.

Exercise 18.4 ‫الترويج للسياحة مهم‬ ‫األكل باليد اليمنى شي الزم في‬ ‫اإلسالم‬ c. ‫شرب الماي صحي‬ d. ‫هوايتي الرسم‬ e. ‫ق راية الكتب شيء وايد ممتع‬ a. b.

əʔttarwiidʒ ləssəjaaħa muhəm əlʔakəl bəlʔiid ʔljəmiin ʃaj laazəm fəlʔislaam ʃərb əlmaaj sˤəhħi həwaajti ʔərrasəm graajat ʔəlkətəb ʃaj waajəd mumtəʕ

Exercise 19.1 a. 3  b. 5  c. 7  d. 1  e.  2  f. 6  g. 4

Exercise 19.2 a. b. c. d. e.

‫زعالنة‬ ‫خ وّاف‬ ّ ‫ف‬ ‫ضي‬ ‫يديد‬ ّ ‫م‬ ‫ض ايقة‬

zaʕlaana xawwaaf fəðˤðˤi jədiid məðˤðˤaajga

Exercise 19.3 a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.

‫أدفش‬ ‫أدفى‬ ‫أبرد‬ ‫أحر‬ ‫أضيق‬ ‫أفيد‬ ‫أقل‬ ‫أرقى‬ ‫أغبى‬ ‫أعقل‬

ʔadfaʃ ʔadfa ʔabrad ʔaħar ʔaðˤjaʤ ʔafjad ʔagal ʔarqa ʔaɣba ʔaʕgal

155

Key to Exercises

Exercise 19.4 a.  the ancient car c.  the absent student e.  The news is boring. g.  The room looks closed.

b.  the pink dress d.  The book is new. f.  The boy seems generous.

Exercise 19.5 a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

‫أقدم فون‬ ‫الطبق األلذ‬ ‫أكثر كتاب مطلوب‬ ‫أقوى بناية‬ ‫أرقى غرفة‬ ‫أخيس نتيجة‬ ‫أكثر حد يضحك‬

ʔagdam foon ətˤtˤabaq əlʔalað ʔakθar ktaab matˤluub ʔagwa bənaaja ʔarqa ɣərfa ʔaxjas natiiʤa ʔakθar ħad jðˤaħħək

Exercise 20.1 a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j

‫عسى‬ ‫بخوف‬ ‫باحت رام‬ ‫عدل‬ ‫غص بًا عن‬ ‫أكيد‬ ‫تقري بًا‬ ‫وايد‬ ّ ‫يال‬ ّ ‫يال‬ ‫نهائ يًا‬

ʕasa əbxoof bəħtəraam ʕadəl ɣasˤban ʕan ʔakiid taqriiban waajəd jaalla jaalla nəhaaʔijjan

Exercise 20.2 a. b. c. d. e.

156

‫أمس‬ ‫اليوم‬ ‫باكر‬ ‫من جريب‬ ‫بعدين‬

ʔams əljoom baaʧər mən ʤəriib baʕdeen

Exercise 20.3 a. b. c. d.

‫داخل‬ ‫ورا‬ ‫هني‬ ‫تحت‬

Key to Exercises

daaxəl wara hnii taħat

Exercise 20.4 a. b. c. d. e

‫بين فترة وفترة‬ ‫فالعادة‬ ‫فالعادة‬ ‫نادرًا‬ ‫داي ًم ا‬

been fatra w fatra fəl ʕaada fəl ʕaada naadəran daajman

Exercise 20.5 a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

‫جاوبَ ت ببرود‬ ‫تم يتكلم بعناد‬ ‫تصرف مب مقبول نهائ يًا‬ ‫كنت زعالنة شوي‬ ‫بنتكلم بعدين‬ ‫بتمشى الليلة‬ ‫بسير مناك‬ ‫كل مكان أحصله‬

ʤawəbat bəbruud tamm jətkallam bəʕnaad tasˤarruf mub maqbuul nəhaaʔijjan kənt zaʕlaana ʃwaj banətkallam baʕdeen batmaʃʃa əlleela basiir mənnaak/hnaak kəl məkaan ʔaħasˤlah

Exercise 21.1 a. 3   b. 1   c. 5   d. 2   e.  4

Exercise 21.2 a.  on the cupboard b.  behind the restaurant c.  inside the box d.  outside the shop e.  in the middle of the room

157

Key to Exercises

Exercise 21.3 a. b. c. d. e.

‫راوية رسمتلي اياها‬ ‫سالم عطاها اياها‬ ‫اختي عطتها اياه‬ ‫ابوية سوالي اياه‬ ‫اماية خيطتلي اياه‬

raawja rəsmatli əjjaaha saaləm ʕatˤaha əjjaha əxti ʕatˤatha əjjaah əbuuja sawwaali əjjaah ummaaja xajjətˤtatli əjjaah

Rawya drew it for me. Salem gave it to her. My sister gave it to her. Dad made it for me. Mom sewed it for me.

Exercise 22.1 a. All of you c. Many of you e. Anyone g. Some of the clothes i. a bit

b. Each one of them d. Most of the books f. Half of the food h. some j. a few

Exercise 23.1 a. b. c. d. e.

‫ثمانية وتسعين‬ ‫ثالثة وعشرين‬ ‫أربعة وستين‬ ‫أربعمية وثنين وثالثين‬ ‫عشرين ألف وثنين وأربعين‬

Exercise 23.2 a. the eighth floor b. the second person c. the first city d. the fifth country e. the tenth place

Exercise 23.3 a. b. c. d. e. 158

‫الخميس‬ ‫األحد‬ ‫السبت‬ ‫األربعا‬ ‫الثالثا‬

lxəmiis laħad əssabt larbəʕa əθθalaaθa

θəmaanja w təsʕiin θalaaθa w ʕəʃriin ʔarbaʕa w səttiin ʔarbaʕəmja w θneen w θalaaθiin ʕəʃriin ʔalf w θneen w ʔarbəʕiin

Exercise 23.4

Key to Exercises

a. 5   b. 4   c. 3   d. 2   e.  1

Exercise 24.1 a. b. c. d. e. f.

‫الزم‬ ‫ضروري‬ ‫المفروض‬ ‫ احتمال‬/‫ممكن‬ ‫يروم‬ ‫الضروري‬

laazəm ðˁaruuri lmafruuðˁ mumkən/ əħtħmaal jruum əðˁðˁaruuri

Exercise 24.2 a. b. c. d.

‫يمكن‬ ‫احتمال‬ ‫أكيد‬ ‫أونه‬

jəmkən əħtħmaal ʔakiid ʔawənnah

Exercise 24.3 a. I have to go. b. I may go out. c. I may cancel. d. It’s normal that I laughed. e. It’s impossible that I get scared. f. I must verify. g. I will probably get sad. h. You must attend the graduation. i. You must come tomorrow. j. You should sleep. k. I may not be able to go out. l. He can’t lift it.

Exercise 24.4 a. b. c. d. e.

‫أحمد يبا يتكلم‬ ‫راشد تمنى انه ينجح‬ ‫علي يروم يسوق‬ ‫مريم تمنت تيي‬ ‫مايا توقعت انها تفوز‬

ʔaħmad jəba jətkallam raaʃəd tmanna ʔənnah jənʤaħ ʕəli jruum jsuug marjam tmannat təjjii maaja twaqqəʕat ənha tfuuz

159

Key to Exercises

Exercise 25.1 a. 6  b. 2  c. 7  d. 5  e.  4  f. 1  g. 3

Exercise 25.2 a. b. c. d. e. f.

‫ال تشرب‬ ‫بس‬ ‫ال بكتب‬ ‫مب‬ ‫ال تاكل‬ ‫وال‬

laa təʃrab bas laa baktəb mub laa taakəl wala

Exercise 25.3 a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l.

‫ما‬ ‫موول‬ ‫جد‬ ‫ما‬ ‫وال شي‬ ‫ما حد‬ ‫أي حد‬ ‫موول‬ ‫رحت‬ ‫حتى‬ ‫أبد‬ ‫شفت‬

maa muul ʧəd maa nothing ma ħħad ʔaj ħad muul rəħt ħatta ʔabad ʧəft

Exercise 25.4 a. He refused to reply to anyone. b. I don’t want anything. c. There’s no bread. d. I’ll do nothing today. e. No one told you to go out. f. There is no single box. g. There’s no one in the restaurant. h. Hassan knows English but not Korean.

160

Exercise 26.1 a. ‫مدير صغير‬ b. ‫شغل علي‬ c. ‫مشكلة جديمة‬ d. ‫قالص صغير‬ e. ‫صورة حلوة‬ f. ‫هالحكومة‬ g. ‫هاييج الشركة‬ h. ‫هاذيال الناس‬ i. ‫هاذيالك األيدين الكبيرة‬ j. ‫هاذيالك األماكن اليديدة‬ k. ‫الريال اللي فالحفلة‬ l. ‫الكوب اللي فوق الطاولة‬ m. ‫القطوة تحت التلفزيون‬ n. ‫المكان اللي أسيره‬ o. ‫المدينة اللي أعيش فيها‬ p. ‫البنت اللي باعت السيارة‬

Key to Exercises

mudiir sˤəɣiir ʃəɣəl ʕəli məʃkəla ʤədiima glaasˤ sˤəɣiir sˤuura ħəlwa hal ħəkuuma haajiiʧ əʃʃarika haaðeela ənnaas haaðeelaak əlʔidiin əlkəbiira haaðeelaak əlʔamaakən əljədiida ərrajjaal əlli fəl ħafla əlkoob əlli foog ətˤtˤaawla əlgatˤwa taħt əttəlvəzjoon əlməkaan əlli ʔasiirah əlmadiina əlli ʔaʕiiʃ fiiha əlbənt əlli baaʕat əssajjaara

Exercise 26.2 a. Mariam’s father b. a small place c. an old place d. the beautiful eye e. the easy problem f. a long week g. the first problem h. a big picture i. some players j. this dog k. the History test l. that cloud m. the phone on the floor n. the cat on the mat o. the garden behind the house p. the book that I wrote q. the museum that I visited

161

Key to Exercises

Exercise 27.1 a. the cow’s milk b. the bear’s eye c. the house’s grass d. Ahmed’s shoe e. the office’s table f. the house of the owners/ the owners’ house g. Maryam’s toy h. chicken’s egg i. the office’s box j. Fatma’s umbrella

Exercise 27.2 a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k.

‫أخو علي‬ ‫مكتب المدير‬ ‫صقف البيت‬ ‫كورة أحمد‬ ‫ذهب مريم‬ ‫كلب الجي ران‬ ‫قهوة سالم‬ ‫إبرة الدكتور‬ ‫ورقة االمتحان‬ ‫قلم االستاذ‬ ‫كتاب الطالب‬

Ɂəxu ʕəli maktab əlmudiir sˁaqf əlbeet kuurat ʔaħmad ðahab marjam tʃalb əljiiraan gahwat salem Ɂəbrat əddəktoor wərəqat ləmtəħaan galam ləstaað ktaab ətˁtˁaaləb

Exercise 28.1

162

a. Muhammad was a skilled lawyer. b. Sheikh Zayed was our first father. c. Sheikh Mohammed bin Zayed is a role model for everyone. d. Huda is a history teacher. e. Nayef is a hardworking pilot. f. Joelle is a famous designer. g. There is a cat on the sofa. h. There are books on the shelf. i. UAE has seven Emirates. j. My university has many students. k. Issa sent a book to Hind. l. My sister broke the cup. m. Saeed ordered flowers for Maitha. n. Nora gave her money to Khawla. o. Omar read Rami a story.

p. Rana taught her brother how to cook. q. Mahmood prepared the food. r. Ibrahim lent Yousef fifty dirhams. s. Ali built for Muna a big house. t. Zayed wrote/did the homework.

Key to Exercises

Exercise 28.2 a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.

‫خليفة اتَخذ الق رار‬ ‫ساف رنا في الصيف‬ ‫شما اشترت فستان‬ ‫أحمد د َورك في كل مكان‬ ‫مات أخوه وهم فالرحلة‬ ‫الشرطة تد َور في كل مكان‬ ‫ولد اخوي يبا يصير دكتور‬ ‫الطرد توه وصل‬ ‫حمد اشترى سيارة يديدة‬ ‫حمدة تحس أنها خايفة‬

xəliifa əttaxað əlqaraar saafarna f əsˤsˤeef ʃamma əʃtarat fəstaan aħmad dawwark fi kəl məkaan maat əxuuh w hom f ərrəħla əʃʃərtˤa əddawwər fi kəl məkaan walad ʔəxuuj jəba əjsˤiir dəktoor ətˤtˤard tawwah wəsˤal ħamad əʃtara sajjaara jədiida ħamda tħəss anha xaajfah

Exercise 29.1 a. Sarah was playing with her brother yesterday. b. Hassan was fixing his burnt car. c. Muhammad was threatening the doctor. d. Laila started hitting Ramez. e. Hazza had a bad intention. f. Ummima went to say hi to her brother. g. Nour wore her mother’s dress. h. Rashid went to cut his hair.

Exercise 29.2 a. b. c. d. e.

‫أحمد يالس يفكر في مستقبله‬ ‫ريم كانت بتلبس فستان‬ ‫خليفة بدا يضارب خالد‬ ‫خلص سعيد من ق راية الكتاب‬ ‫نور قاعدة تقص شعرها‬

ʔaħmad jaaləs jfakkər fi mustagbalah reem kaanat batəlbas fustaan xəliifa bəda jðˁaarəb xaaləd xallasˁ sʕiid mən graajat ləktaab nuur gaaʕda tgəsˁ ʃaʕarha

163

Key to Exercises

Exercise 30.1 a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

‫تغسل‬ ‫يشرب‬ ‫تشتري‬ ‫يبيع‬ ‫تفتح‬ ‫يدرس‬ ‫تسرق‬ ‫يعطي‬

təɣsəl jəʃrab tʃtri jbiiʕ təftaħ jədrəs təsrəg jəʕtˤii

Exercise 30.2 a. My brother always argues with me. b. Glass always breaks when it falls. c. The thief always steals. d. The taxi driver is always driving. e. My friend always pays for me. f. The mother always takes care of her children. g. My dad always encourages me to study.

Exercise 30.3 a. b. c. d. e. f.

‫الطالب يدرس عدل قبل االمتحان‬ ‫األبو يشتغل عشان أهله‬ ‫المريض يتعب بدون دواه‬ ‫االمهات يحصلون هدايا فعيد األم‬ ‫المكتبة توفر كتب للي يقرون‬ ‫السمج يسبح فالبحر‬

Exercise 31.1

164

a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

‫دقت‬ ‫كل‬ ‫يت‬ ‫خ بّر‬ ‫س وّت‬ ‫ح ّس ت‬ ‫شرب‬ ‫ق را‬

daggat kall jat xabbar sawwat ħassat ʃarab gəra

əʔtˤtˤaaləb jədrəs ʕadəl gabəl əlʔmtəħan əlʔubu jəʃtəɣəl ʕaʃaan ʔahlah əlmriiðˁ jətʕab bduun dwaah əlʔummahaat jħasˁluun hdaaja əfʕiid əlʔum əlmaktəba twaffər kətəb ləlli jəgroon ʔssəmatʃ jəsbaħ fəlbaħar

Exercise 31.2 a. b. c. d. e. f.

‫الطالب حب تخصصه‬ ‫الياهل صاح ألنه كان بروحه‬ ‫االبو خذ عياله أمريكا‬ ‫الليت اشتغل امس‬ ‫االم سوت عشا لعيالها‬ ‫الكرسي نكسر ألنه جديم‬

Key to Exercises

ətˤtˤaaləb ħab taxasˁsˁəsˁah əljaahəl sˁaaħ lʔanna kaan bruuħa əlʔubu xað ʕjaalah ʔamriika əlleet əʃtaɣal ʔams əlʔum sawwat ʕəʃa ləʕjaalha əlkərsi ənkəsar lʔanna dʒdiim

Exercise 32.1 a. b. c. d. e. f.

‫تمت‬ ‫تم‬ ‫قاعد‬ ‫قاعدة‬ ‫بدت‬ ‫بدا‬

tammat tam gaaʕəd gaaʕda bədat bəda

Exercise 32.2 a. 5  b. 3  c. 2  d. 1  e.  6  f. 7  g. 4

Exercise 33.1 a. The cream that I bought is good. b. The flower that I smelled is beautiful. c. Most of those who left are busy. d. The girls who visited us are tall. e. Any snack that everyone buys must be tasty. f. Everyone likes that we study abroad. g. The key if you lose it is hard to find. h. I am the one whose friend won a prize. i. The speed is a reason why traffic accidents happen. j. The car he bought is fancy.

165

Key to Exercises

Exercise 33.2 a. b. c. d. e. f.

‫الريال اللي شفته أمس‬ ‫البنت اللي يت أمس‬ ‫المكان اللي س رته‬ ‫مريم كلت اللي طبخته موزة‬ ‫موزة عاشت وين أمها عاشت‬ ‫علي تحرى انه سالم طالب شاطر‬

ərrajjaal ʔəlli ʃəftah ʔams əlbənt ʔəlli jat ʔams əlməkaan ʔəlli sərtah marjam kalat ʔəlli tˤəbxatah mooza mooza ʕaaʃat ween umha ʕaaʃat ʕəli tħarra ənnah saaləm tˤaaləb ʃaatˤər

Exercise 34.1 a. b. c. d. e.

‫منو‬ ‫كيف‬ ‫وين‬ ‫ليش‬ ‫متى‬

mnuu keef ween leeʃ məta

Exercise 34.2 a. Did Sarah do the homework last weekend? b. Munira answered the question, right? c. Reem didn’t make the cake, or she made it? d. Salem broke the plate, no? e. Do you think she will listen to what you say? f. You’re attending the wedding, right?

Exercise 34.3

166

a. b.

‫ نوف تسأل إذا انت فاضي الحين‬noof təsʔal ʔiða ənta faaðˤi ʔalħiin ‫ أحمد يتخبر ليش بعدكم ما وصلتوا‬ʔaħmad jətxabbar leeʃ baʕadkum maa

c. d. e. f. g. h.

‫ص ال؟‬ ً ‫ليش أنا سألتك أ‬ ‫أسويلك شاي؟‬ ‫!شو هالفلم الممل‬ ‫وين سار سعيد الويكند اللي طاف؟‬ ‫كيف كسرت الفازة وليش؟‬ ‫محمد رد عليك صح؟‬

wəsˤaltu leeʃ ʔana saʔaltək ʔasˤlan? ʔasawwiilək ʧaaj? ʃuu hal fəlm əlmuməl! ween saar sʕiid əlwiikand ʔəlli tˤaaf? keef kəsrat əlvaaza w leeʃ? mħammad rad ʕaleek sˤaħ?

Exercise 35.1 a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

‫أول‬ ‫من‬ ‫ألن‬ ‫اذا‬ ‫يوم‬ ‫اذا‬ ‫عقب‬ ‫اذا‬

Key to Exercises

ʔawwal mən ləʔan ʔiða joom ʔiða ʕəgəb ʔiða

Exercise 35.2 a. Fatima started eating healthily, after going to the gym. b. Saif sells his books if he gets bored of them. c. Khaled was still studying before working. d. Rawda started driving when she started working. e. Hamad applied for the job before he travelled. f. Mariam and Hamdah reconciled after they had a fight in the lecture. g. Majed started to change after he got promoted in the company.

Exercise 35.3 a. b. c. d.

‫مريم نشت من وقت عشان توصل‬ ‫عالوقت‬ ‫شمسة بتغير مدرستها لو ما يابت‬ ‫عالمات عالية‬ ‫حمدة ساعدت امها لين فليل‬ ‫ميثا راحت است راليا وقت الصيف‬

‫ما بتنجح اذا ما درست‬ ‫كانت موزه زعالنة عشان يدتها‬ ‫ماتت‬ g. ‫علي درس عشان يدش الجامعة‬ h. ‫على إنه السيارة قديمة إال إنها بعدها‬ ‫زينة‬ e. f.

marjam naʃʃat mən wagt ʕaʃaan tuusˁal ʕalwagt ʃamsa bətɣajjər madrəsətha law maa jaabat ʕalamaat ʕaalja ħamda saaʕədat umha leen fəlleel meeθa raaħat ʔəstraalja wagt esˁsˁeef maa btəndʒaħ ʔiða maa dərast kaanat mooza zaʕlaanah ʕaʃaan jaddathaa maatat ʕəlj dəras ʕaʃaan jdəʃ ʔəldʒaamʕa ʕala ʔənnah əssajjaara gədiima ʔəlla ənhaa baʕdha zeena

167

Key to Exercises

Exercise 36.1 a. b. c. d. e.

‫بعدين‬ ‫وال‬ ‫لكن‬ ‫كلما … كلما‬ ‫ال … وال‬

baʕdeen walla laakən kǝl maa…kǝl maa laa … wlaa

Exercise 36.2 a. Mariam traveled to France and the US. b. Will we go to the mall or the cinema? c. Fatima wants the red outfit, not the yellow one. d. We will eat dinner and then go to the party. e. Neither Sara nor Khaled like to eat meat.

Exercise 36.3

168

a. b. c. d.

‫علي راح الحفلة و شاف احمد‬ ‫تفضل االحمر أو االبيض ؟‬ ‫احمد و خالد راحوا المدرسة‬ ‫تقدر تدرس أو بترسب فاالمتحان‬

e. f.

‫انا احب القهوة و الشاي‬ ‫انا ما احب الدياي وال السمك‬

g.

‫ كل ما ص رتي أمتن‬،‫كل ما كلتي أكثر‬

ʕǝlii raaħ ǝlħafla w ʧaaf ʔaħmad tfaðˤðˤǝl ǝlʔaħmar ʔaw ǝlʔabjaðˤ? ʔaħmad wa xaalǝd raħaw ǝlmadrǝsa tǝgdar tǝdrǝs ʔaw bǝtǝrsab fǝlǝmtǝħaan ʔana ʔaħǝb ǝlghawa w ǝltʃaaj ʔana maa ʔaħǝb ǝddijaaj wala ǝssǝmatʃ kǝl maa kalti ʔakθar kǝl maa sˤǝrtii ʔamtan

INDEX

Note: Page numbers followed by “n” denote endnotes. abbreviations 22; see also word formation adjective 24, 37, 54, 68–74, 93, 97, 102, 107; attributive 68; comparative 69–70, 72; predicative 68; superlative 69–70 adverb 74–80, 111; adverbial 59, 111; of degree 76; of frequency 76–77; of manner 75–76; of place 75; of possibility 77; of speaker’s attitude 78; of time 74 affixation 21 aspect 34, 115, 117–128; grammatical 126–128; imperfective 117–120, 127; perfective 2, 34, 117, 122–126 back formation 22; see also word formation blending 22 broken plural 24–26 causatives 57 complement clauses 129–131 complex verb constructions 115–116 consonants 2–10, 16, 21, 25–26, 34, 36; geminate 5, 7, 8 consonantal root 21, 25, 34, 81, 117 construct state 106–110 coordination 89, 139–141; correlatives 140 copula 112 copular sentences see copula definiteness 24, 26, 28, 68, 85, 90, 97, 101, 106, 129; definite nouns 26, 28, 85, 101–102, 106, 129; indefinite nouns 85, 97, 101, 129 diacritics 16–17

diglossia 1 ditransitive verbs 59–62, 84, 112; see also transitivity existentials 113 gender 2, 21, 24–25, 30, 32, 68, 89, 101, 111; feminine 22, 24–25, 30, 68, 69, 89, 90, 101, 107; masculine 2, 22, 24–25, 30, 32, 34, 68, 69, 89, 90 grammatical aspect see aspect Gulf Arabic i, vii, 1–2 imperfective aspect see aspect International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) vii, 3, 10n1, 13n1 intransitive verbs 41, 59–62; see also transitivity koine 1 loanwords 22–23 masdar see nominalization modality 93–96; auxiliaries 93–94; necessity 93–94; possibility 74, 77, 93, 94; verbs of 94 Modern Standard Arabic (MSA) i, 1–2, 3, 14, 34, 56, 88 modifier 102–103, 111 moon letters 26; see also definiteness morphology: non‑concatenative 21; see also word formation negation 97–100; negative polarity items 97–98 nominalization 63; masdar 63–64

169

Index

noun 2, 21, 22, 24–29, 63–67, 68, 81, 89, 90, 101–105, 106, 129–130; phrase 60, 68, 81, 101–105, 129; verbal 63–67 number 2n1, 21, 24–25, 30, 68, 101, 111; dual 24–25; plural 2n1, 21, 24–26, 30, 89, 101; singular 24–26, 30, 34, 59, 101 numeral 88–92; cardinal 88–89; ordinal 89–90

reduplication 22 reflexives 30, 51, 56 relative clauses 102, 103, 129–131, 133; marker 103; 129, 130; nonrestrictive 129; restrictive 129; with resumptive pronouns 129 root 2n1, 21, 25–26, 34, 36n1, 37, 39, 41, 45, 48, 51, 54, 56, 59, 81, 117, 118

passive 41, 48, 51 past perfect 122–123 past tense 34, 59, 112, 117, 122 perfective aspect see aspect person 21, 24, 30, 34, 59, 122; first 30; second 30; third 30, 34, 59 plural see number possessives 22, 30, 81, 82, 102, 106–110, 113; prepositions 81, 82 prefix 21, 26, 41, 45, 48, 56, 63, 81, 85, 101, 106, 117, 119 preposition 31, 60, 70, 81–84, 86, 101, 103, 111, 113, 129, 133; complex 81–82; possessive 81–82; simple 81 present tense 112, 117, 119 pronoun 22, 30–33, 36, 60, 82, 107–108, 113, 122, 129; demonstrative 31; object 31, 82, 113; possessive 22, 107–108; reflexive 30; resumptive 129; subject 30–31

singular see number sound plural 25; see also number subordinate clauses 136–138 suffix 21, 24–25, 60, 74, 82, 86, 88, 107, 108, 117–118, 122 sun letters 26; see also definiteness

quantifiers 85–87 questions 132–134; echo 133; embedded 134; wh‑questions 132–134; yes‑no questions 132–134

170

transitive verbs 59–61; see also transitivity transitivity 41, 59–62, 112 verb 2n1, 21, 24, 30, 31, 34–67, 69, 82, 93–95, 97, 101, 111–130; Form I 34–36, 48, 59, 63; Form II 37–38, 41, 63; Form III 39–40, 45, 63; Form IX 54–55; Form V 41, 64; Form VI 45–47, 64; Form VII 48–50; Form VIII 51–53, 64; Form X 56–58, 64 verbal noun see noun vocalic pattern 21 vowels 11–13, 16, 25, 34, 63 wh‑in‑situ 133 word formation 21–23, 74, 117